Download Print this page

Rohde & Schwarz dataTec ZNB3000 User Manual

Vector network analyzers

page of 1734

/ 1734
Bookmarks

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

®

R&S

ZNB3000

Vector Network Analyzers

User Manual

(;ÝØé2)

1179749102

Version 04

Ihr Ansprechpartner /

Your Partner:

dataTec AG

E-Mail: info@datatec.eu

>>> www.datatec.eu

Advertisement

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the dataTec ZNB3000 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz dataTec ZNB3000

Page 1 ® R&S ZNB3000 Vector Network Analyzers User Manual Ihr Ansprechpartner / Your Partner: dataTec AG E-Mail: info@datatec.eu >>> www.datatec.eu (;ÝØé2) 1179749102 Version 04...
Page 2 This document applies to the following vector network analyzer models and their options: ● ® R&S ZNB3004, 2 test ports, type N (f) – Base unit 9 kHz to 4.5 GHz, order no. 1351.5050K02 – Option R&S ZNB3-B082 "upgrade to 9 GHz", order no. 1351.5067.02 ●...
Page 3 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............15 Safety instructions......................15 Warning messages in the documentation..............18 Korea certification class A..................18 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNB3000............19 Documentation overview....................19 2.1.1 Getting started manual....................19 2.1.2 User manual and help....................19 2.1.3 Service manual......................
Page 4 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 3.3.1 Manual operation......................39 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window..............45 3.3.3 Touchscreen gestures....................51 3.3.4 Working with dialogs..................... 53 3.3.5 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers..............55 3.3.6 Entering data.........................58 3.3.7 Scaling diagrams......................62 Performing measurements..................67 3.4.1 Transmission S-parameter measurement..............
Page 5 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 4.4.3 Memory-mapped trace data transfer................148 Calibration......................... 150 4.5.1 Calibration types......................151 4.5.2 Calibration standards and calibration kits..............164 4.5.3 Calibration pool......................170 4.5.4 Calibration state labels....................170 4.5.5 Automatic calibration....................171 4.5.6 Scalar power calibration....................183 4.5.7 SMARTerCal........................189 4.5.8 Recommended calibration methods................191 4.5.9 Parallel calibration of multiple channels..............
Page 6 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 4.7.18 Precision frequency reference..................254 4.7.19 GPIB interface......................254 4.7.20 Device control......................254 4.7.21 Handler I/O (universal interface)................. 255 4.7.22 RFFE GPIO interface....................255 4.7.23 Additional removable system drive................256 4.7.24 Extended power range....................256 4.7.25 Extended dynamic range.................... 257 4.7.26 Receiver step attenuators...................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool......................329 Scale softtool......................335 5.4.1 Scale Values tab......................335 5.4.2 Scale Coupling tab...................... 338 5.4.3 Zoom tab........................338 Trace Config softtool....................340 5.5.1 Traces tab........................340 5.5.2 Mem tab........................346 5.5.3 All Mem All Data tab....................349 5.5.4 Math tab........................
Page 8 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool.......................425 5.8.1 Stimulus tab........................ 426 5.8.2 Power tab........................428 5.8.3 Time Domain tab......................428 Power Bw Avg softtool..................... 430 5.9.1 Power tab........................430 5.9.2 Bandwidth tab......................432 5.9.3 Average tab......................... 433 5.10 Sweep Softtool......................435 5.10.1 Sweep Params tab......................435 5.10.2...
Page 9 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 5.13.6 Balanced tab....................... 673 5.13.7 Ground Loop tab......................677 5.13.8 Differential Match tab....................679 5.13.9 Config tab........................681 5.13.10 Deembed Assistant tab....................682 5.13.11 Delta-L tab........................694 5.14 File softtool........................701 5.14.1 Recall sets tab......................702 5.14.2 Favorites tab....................... 706 5.14.3 Print tab........................707 5.14.4...
Page 10 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 5.18 Help softtool......................856 5.19 Additional function keys..................857 6 Remote control...................859 Introduction to remote control.................859 6.1.1 Starting a remote control session................860 6.1.2 GPIB Explorer......................860 6.1.3 Switchover to remote control..................862 6.1.4 Combining manual and remote control............... 865 Messages........................
Page 11 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 6.6.3 How to create and export SCPI scripts............... 898 6.6.4 How to open the context sensitive help for the SCPI commands....... 900 7 Command reference................901 Special terms and notation..................901 7.1.1 Upper- vs. lower-case....................902 7.1.2 Special characters.......................902 7.1.3...
Page 12 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 7.4.4 Utilization commands....................1568 7.4.5 Service date commands....................1575 R&S ZVR/ZVABT compatible commands..............1577 8 Programming examples..............1604 Basic tasks......................1604 8.1.1 Typical stages of a remote control program.............. 1604 8.1.2 Channel, trace and diagram handling............... 1607 Condensed programming examples..............1613 8.2.1 Path-independent remote control programs..............1614 8.2.2...
Page 13 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 12.1.1 Firmware update....................... 1652 12.1.2 Remote operation in a LAN..................1653 12.2 System recovery..................... 1657 12.3 Interfaces and connectors..................1657 12.3.1 Rear panel connectors....................1657 12.3.2 LAN interface......................1659 12.3.3 GPIB interface......................1660 12.3.4 Handler I/O (universal interface)................1663 12.3.5 RFFE GPIO interface....................
Page 14 ® Contents R&S ZNB3000 User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 15 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB3000 Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following sections. Intended use The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Page 16 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB3000 Safety instructions Reconfigure or adjust the product only as described in the product documentation or the specifications document. Any other modifications can affect safety and are not per- mitted. Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde &...
Page 17 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB3000 Safety instructions special protection against electric shock. This protection principle is referred to as SELV (safety extra-low voltage) and is based on a low voltage level and increased insulation. Exceptions are indicated by a measurement category on the product and given in the specifications document.
Page 18 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB3000 Korea certification class A Hot surface Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire. Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This connec- tion protects you against electric shock if an electric problem occurs.
Page 19 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB3000 R&S ZNB3000 Documentation overview 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNB3000 This manual is intended to provide you with all information that is necessary for setup, manual and remote control of the R&S ZNB3000. We also invite you to find out what is new in the current revision of the software and learn how to make best use of our documentation and of the help system.
Page 20 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB3000 R&S ZNB3000 Documentation overview The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS): https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com 2.1.4 Instrument security procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNB3000 in secure areas. It is available for download on the internet.
Page 21 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ZNB3000 Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for use.....................21 ● Instrument tour......................31 ● Operating the instrument..................38 ● Performing measurements..................67 3.1 Preparing for use...
Page 22 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use Electromagnetic compatibility classes The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the specifications document. ● Class B equipment is suitable for use in: –...
Page 23 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly, same dimensions Middle = Stacked correctly, different dimensions Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.
Page 24 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use 2. Remove the R&S ZNB3000 from the rack. 3. If placing the R&S ZNB3000 on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the R&S ZNB3000. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit. 3.1.5 Considerations for test setup Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI) Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
Page 25 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use ► NOTICE! Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test (DUT). Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage: a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground. b) Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
Page 26 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use 2. If necessary, press the standby toggle key on the front panel to switch the instru- ment to the ready state. Section 3.1.8, "Standby and ready state", on page 26. ® The instrument automatically performs a system check, boots the Windows oper- ating system and then starts the vector network analyzer (VNA) application.
Page 27 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use 3.1.9 Windows operating system ® The analyzer is equipped with a Windows operating system, which has been config- ured according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system configu- ration can be necessary to: ●...
Page 28 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use Firewall settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends using the firewall on your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled.
Page 29 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 3.1.11 Connecting external accessories The analyzer's standard PC interfaces (Monitor, USB, LAN) can be used to connect various accessories: ● ® An external monitor expands/displays the Windows desktop, which is, by default, covered by the vector network analyzer (VNA) application window in full-screen mode.
Page 30 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Preparing for use Keyboard configuration The default input language is English – US. Select "Settings" > "Time & language" > ® "Language & region" from the Windows Start menu to manage languages and key- boards. ®...
Page 31 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour Printer configuration Use the "Printer Setup" dialog of the firmware (System – [File Print] > "Print...") or the ® Windows printer management to configure the printer properties and printing prefer- ences. 3.1.11.5 Connecting a LAN cable A LAN cable can be connected to the LAN connector on the rear panel of the analyzer.
Page 32 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour Figure 3-1: R&S ZNB3004 with four ports 3.2.1.1 Touchscreen The analyzer is equipped with a 12.1'' diagonal WXGA, 18-bit color LCD touchscreen. The touchscreen presents all measurement results, mostly in the form of diagrams. Besides, all instrument functions can be accessed and operated by tapping the control elements on the touchscreen.
Page 33 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again if any front panel key is pressed.
Page 34 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour ® – Standard Windows functions used to create, save or recall recall sets, and to shut down the application – Settings that control how to copy the active screen and to create hardcopies of the current recall set ●...
Page 35 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour 3.2.1.4 Rotary knob The rotary knob increases and decreases numerical values, scrolls within lists, acti- vates controls and confirms entries. ● Turning the rotary knob to the left or right is equivalent to pressing the [△] (up) or [▽] (down) navigation key multiple times.
Page 36 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour 3.2.1.7 Front panel connectors The test ports and four USB connectors are located on the front panel of the R&S ZNB3000. Test ports Numbered connectors: ● Type N female for R&S ZNB3004 ● 3.5 mm male for R&S ZNB3020 The test ports serve as outputs for the RF stimulus signal and as inputs for the mea- sured RF signals from the DUT (response signals).
Page 37 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Instrument tour Figure 3-2: Four-port R&S ZNB3004 rear view Table 3-2: Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description (Power Power on / off switch, see Section 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off", I/O) on page 25...
Page 38 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Index Label Description SYSTEM Contains the removable system drive of the instrument, containing all software DRIVE (including the operating system and the VNA application) and data. Do not remove the system drive during operation. Option R&S ZNB-B19 provides an additional removable system drive (including operating system and firmware).
Page 39 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Manual and remote control of the instrument Manual control of the R&S ZNB3000 is possible either via its touchscreen and front panel keys, via locally connected keyboard and mouse (see Section 3.1.11, "Connect- ing external accessories", on page 29), or via Remote Desktop (see also...
Page 40 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Customizing the screen The contents of the screen and the size and position of many display and control ele- ments are not fixed. You can display or hide most elements. You can also drag and drop traces, info fields, and even the softtool panel to your preferred position;...
Page 41 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 2. Activate the desired softtool tab, e.g. "Z←Sij". User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 42 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3. Select a control element, e.g. "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A button with an opener icon (e.g.
Page 43 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. At the same time, the related softtool tab is opened. Using context menus Context menus are another alternative for quick access to instrument settings.
Page 44 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3. Select "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 45 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
Page 46 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Section 4.2.1, "Display elements of a diagram", on page 89 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
Page 47 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument These icons represent the undo and redo actions that are also available via the menu bar items "System" > "Undo" / "Redo". Undo reverses the last action, redo reverses the last undo action (if possi- ble).
Page 48 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3.3.2.3 Softtools Softtools display groups of related settings as a tabbed panel. They can be opened via function keys on the front panel or the on-screen "Hard Key" panel, or via menu bar and context menu items.
Page 49 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument directly activates the menu command. When a menu item is selected, the R&S ZNB3000 displays the corresponding softtool. Overview of menu functions ● The "File" menu provides functions to handle recall sets and trace files, to print or save diagram content, and to shut down the VNA application.
Page 50 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument The "Hard Key" panel is particularly useful if the analyzer is controlled from an external monitor or Remote Desktop. For the R&S ZNB3000, it is hidden by default. You can display the "Hard Key" panel using one of the following methods: ●...
Page 51 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument ● The current date and time The progress bar shows a moving color gradient if the current sweep is too fast to be monitored, e.g. because the number of sweep points is low. Additional icons in the status bar indicate a non-standard hardware setup.
Page 52 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Double-tap a diagram to maximize it or to restore its original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time. By dragging your finger over a table or diagram you can pan the displayed area of the table or diagram to show results that were previously out of view.
Page 53 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument ● In stimulus zoom mode, spreading and pinging is disabled by default. Only while "Stim. Zoom Select" is active (toolbar icon or softtool button is toggled on), you can use spreading and pinching to modify the sweep area and/or the vertical scaling. Mouse vs.
Page 54 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument All dialogs are operated in a similar way. ● To open a dialog, select a softtool button with an opener icon ● The title bar of each dialog contains some convenience functions: –...
Page 55 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3.3.5 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace.
Page 56 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3. In the dialog box that opens when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S- parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNB3000 generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select Trace –...
Page 57 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument To add a new marker: ● Drag and drop the icon from the toolbar to the desired position in the target dia- gram. The marker appears on the target diagram's active trace. The marker info field dis- plays the stimulus value (x-axis value) and response value (y-axis value) at the marker position.
Page 58 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Note however, that the last remaining channel cannot be deleted. ● To hide the limit lines and disable the limit check, drag and drop the PASS / FAIL message onto the "Delete" icon. The limit line itself is not deleted and can be reused.
Page 59 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument ® is a standard procedure known from other Windows applications. However, there are various other ways to enter data. 3.3.6.1 Using front panel keys You can use the keys in the data entry keypad to enter numbers, units, and characters. To enter a numeric value: 1.
Page 60 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Operation with touchscreen or mouse: 1. Double-tap (double-click) a numeric input field in a dialog or on a softtool to open the numeric editor. 2. Use the buttons in the numeric keypad to enter a value. 3.
Page 61 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.
Page 62 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3.3.7 Scaling diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 3.3.7.1 Using the graphical zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win- dow) to fill the entire diagram area.
Page 63 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument Use the "Zoom Reset" icon to restore the original diagram. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the "Zoom" label from the additional channel info line onto the toolbar but- ton. Alternative settings ●...
Page 64 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ● Use the [Start], [Stop], [Center], and [Span] function keys from the Stimulus sec- tion. ● Double-tap (with a mouse: double-click) the "Start" or "Stop" label in the channel list.
Page 65 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 3.3.7.5 Circular diagrams The radial scale of a circular diagram ("Polar", "Smith" or "Inverted Smith") can be changed with a single linear parameter, the "Ref Value". The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference. ●...
Page 66 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Operating the instrument 2. Place "M1" to the start value of the desired sweep range and tap Trace – [Marker] > "Set by Marker" > "Start = Marker". 3. Place "M2" to the stop value of the desired sweep range and tap Trace – [Marker] >...
Page 67 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements 3.4 Performing measurements This section takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNB3000 network ana- lyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Prerequisite The instrument is set up, connected to the mains system, and started up as described Section 3.1, "Preparing for use", on page 21.
Page 68 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements 1. Connect the DUT between test ports 1 and 2 of the network analyzer as shown above. 2. Use the [Preset] key to restore a well-defined instrument state. The analyzer is now set to its default state, measuring the transmission S-parame- ter S Select Trace –...
Page 69 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements at port 2. The stimulus signal from the analyzer port no. 2 is not needed except for some calibration types. By default the sweep range is set to the frequency range of the analyzer, which can be unsuitable for your DUT.
Page 70 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements errors, the accuracy requirements of the measurement, on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available. The following example requires a calibration kit with a male Through standard with known transmission characteristics for the related test port connector type and gender. With a single Through, it is possible to perform a transmission normalization, compen- sating for a frequency-dependent attenuation and phase shift in the signal paths.
Page 71 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements 4. Select "Next" to proceed to the next page of the "Calibration Setting" wizard. 5. Select the test port connector type and gender (here: N 50 Ω, female, correspond- ing to a male Through standard), and the calibration kit (here: R&S ZV-Z121). 6.
Page 72 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements The analyzer performs a calibration sweep for the measured quantity S . The magnitude and phase of the result is displayed in two diagrams, together with the expected typical result for a Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected.
Page 73 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements 3.4.1.4 Evaluating data The analyzer provides various tools to optimize the display and analyze the measure- ment data. For instance, you can use markers to determine maxima and minima on the trace, and change the display format to obtain information about the group delay of the transmitted wave.
Page 74 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements Refer to Section 4.2.3, "Trace formats", on page 104 to learn more about the diagram properties. 3.4.1.5 Saving and printing data The analyzer provides standard functions for saving measurement settings and for saving or printing the results. You can use these functions as if you were working on a standard PC.
Page 75 ® Getting started R&S ZNB3000 Performing measurements learn from the data. Only one analyzer test port is required for reflection measure- ments. In principle, a reflection measurement involves the same steps as a transmission mea- surement. Note the following differences: ●...
Page 76 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts 4 Concepts and features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data.
Page 77 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts ● Calibration pool: system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via System – [~Setup]. ●...
Page 78 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts 4.1.3.1 Trace settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...
Page 79 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts 4.1.3.3 Active and inactive traces and channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
Page 80 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved. It is indi- cated in the status bar: All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization.
Page 81 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
Page 82 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts Ch1 Sweep End Ch2 Sweep End Ch3 Sweep End Ch1 HW Sweep Ch2 HW Sweep Ch3 HW Sweep … Ch1 Calc Ch2 Calc Ch3 Calc Ch1 Results Ch2 Results Ch3 Results Figure 4-1: Legacy sweep implementation (no pipelining) For each sweep, trace data processing is triggered when the first data of the last partial measurement arrives.
Page 83 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts 4.1.4.3 Parallel measurements on multiple DUTs The support for parallel measurements on multiple DUTs depends on the analyzer type: ● For a 2-port R&S ZNB3000 or a 4-port R&S ZNB3000 without internal second source (see Section 4.7.17, "Second internal generator",...
Page 84 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts Parallel measurement with frequency offset is transparent to the user: All port groups are measured in the requested frequency range. The results are available in the same form as if they were obtained in separate measurements without frequency offset. During parallel measurements with frequency offset, the firmware uses a modified IF as compared to measurements without frequency offset.
Page 85 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts ● "CW Mode" The stimulus hardkeys define the fixed stimulus frequency ("CW Frequency") and the "Number of Points" of the measurement. The other sweep parameters (e.g. the "Sweep Time") are set via Channel – [Sweep] > "Sweep Params". ●...
Page 86 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts RAW WAVE Channel data flow QUANTITIES for all traces of the channel SYSTEM ERROR CORRECTION (Factory) SYSTEM POWER POWER SYST. ERR. ERROR CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION DATA (User) * DATA (User) * S-parameters Wave quantities with wave de-/embedding...
Page 87 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts calibration on the measured wave quantities, intermediate results were transformed to the S-parameter domain. Before each de-/embedding step, the S-parameters were transformed to conductance (~ wave quantities), and vice versa afterwards. The new "wave de-/embedding" remains in the wave quantity (~conductance) domain and calculates all de-/embedding steps in one multiplication step, without unnecessary matrix inversions.
Page 88 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Basic concepts ZNA/ZNB Channel data flow AVERAGE for all traces of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted ZNA/ZNB Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces SHIFT RESPONSE TIME...
Page 89 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements 4.2 Screen elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Section 4.3, "Measurement results", on page 112.
Page 90 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements 4.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select System – [Display] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
Page 91 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements of the triangle can be changed to modify the diagram scale and shift the trace verti- cally. ● Measured quantity (for the active trace): The measured quantity is indicated in the trace list; see "Trace list and trace settings"...
Page 92 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display. Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace. ● The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions ("Scale Div.") and the reference value ("Ref").
Page 93 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● A normal marker ("M1, M2...") determines the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace. ● The reference marker ("R") defines the reference value for all delta markers. ● A delta marker ("DeltaM1, DeltaM2...") indicates the coordinates relative to the ref- erence marker.
Page 94 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Marker info field The coordinates of all markers defined in a diagram can be displayed in the info field, which by default is located in the upper right corner. The info field contains the following information: ●...
Page 95 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Info Table If you wish to reserve the full diagram space for traces, you can drag & drop the marker info field to the info table. The info table is hidden by default. To display it, open the "Display" softtool (System – [Display]), activate its "Config"...
Page 96 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Marker Format Description Formula dB Mag Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two lines 20 * log|z| dB arctan ( Im(z) / Re(z) ) Lin Mag Phase Magnitude of z (unconverted) and phase in two |z| arctan ( Im(z) / Re(z) ) lines Real Imag...
Page 97 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Marker coupling It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling allows you to compare different measurement results (assigned to dif- ferent traces) at the same stimulus value. It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling can be enabled: ●...
Page 98 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Multiple peak search Multiple peak search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Markers 1 to 10 are assigned to the peaks detected from the start frequency towards the stop frequency.
Page 99 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● "Loss" is the loss of the filter at its maximum (or minimum) and is equal to the response value of marker no. 1. For an ideal bandpass filter, the loss is zero (0 dB), for an ideal bandstop filter it is –∞...
Page 100 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● Stop indicates the highest value of the sweep variable (e.g. the highest frequency measured), corresponding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram. Open a segment's context menu to access common related tasks. Example: The following context menu is assigned to the channel name section: The settings in the context menus correspond to the most common functions in the...
Page 101 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Ports...") call up a dialog. The dialogs of the analyzer have an analogous structure and several common control elements. Dialogs are controlled in the usual way. For an introduction, refer to Section 3.3.4, "Working with dialogs", on page 53.
Page 102 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish: ● Dialogs with immediate settings provide a "Close" button but no "OK" button. Example: "Trace Manager" dialog ● Dialogs with confirmed settings provide both an "OK" button and a "Cancel" button. Example: "Balanced Ports"...
Page 103 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces" in the above screenshot), and file types. Context-specific options (e.g. "Output Format" in the dialog above) are accessible via controls in the section below the "Ask Before Overwriting"...
Page 104 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Figure 4-4: Multi-channel setup dialog The channel selector in the title bar and the channel-related buttons in the lower part of the dialog ("Copy to New Channel", "Copy to New Ch + Diagram" allow you to select the target channels.
Page 105 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Diagram representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram, the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis (x-axis), the response values appear on the vertical axis (y-axis). Graph Scaling ● Except for the "Log Mag"...
Page 106 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Trace Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted |z| = sqrt ( x "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "Delay" Group delay, neg.
Page 107 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
Page 108 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L. Smith chart construction In a Smith chart, the impedance plane is reshaped so that the area with positive resist- ance is mapped into a unit circle.
Page 109 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com- plex resistance to the real and imaginary parts of Γ: According to the two equations above, the graphical representation in a Smith chart has the following properties:...
Page 110 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal conductance G and susceptance B: ● Points with the same conductance are located on circles. ● Points with the same susceptance produce arcs.
Page 111 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Screen elements ● The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative (inductive) and positive (capacitive) susceptive components of the admittance, respectively. Example: Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the inverted Smith chart can be used to read the normalized admittance of the DUT.
Page 112 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results 4.2.3.3 Measured quantities and trace formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity. The following rules can help to avoid inappropriate formats and find the format that is ide- ally suited to the measurement task.
Page 113 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results 4.3.1 S-parameters S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. For a 2-port measurement, the signal flow is as follows. The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S-parameters but does not necessa- rily show the complete signal flow.
Page 114 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Table 4-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2 Reflected power at DUT port i=1,2 Reflection loss at DUT port i=1,2 10 log|S = 20 log|S...
Page 115 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Redefining physical ports can be used to insert external components (e.g. external sig- nal separating devices, power amplifiers etc.) into the signal path. This allows you to develop custom measurements, e.g. to test high-power devices and extend the dynamic range.
Page 116 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results ● Renormalization of the balanced port impedances affects all measured quantities that the analyzer provides for balanced ports. The default reference impedance of a physical port is equal to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port (50 Ω...
Page 117 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results   2. Power waves In the model of Kurokawa ("Power Waves and the Scattering Matrix"), the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows:       ...
Page 118 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Reflection impedance The converted impedance Z (1 ≤ i ≤n) describes the input impedance at port i of the DUT. Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement).
Page 119 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Table 4-5: Calculation of converted series transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Parallel transmission impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z (i ≠ j) can also describe a parallel impedance between the two ports. The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
Page 120 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results 4.3.3.2 Z-parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e. the complete nxn Z-matrix for an n-port DUT). This means that Z-parameters can be used as an alternative to S-parameters (or Y- parameters) to characterize a linear n-port network completely.
Page 121 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results ● is the output impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with open input, I = 0). Z-parameters can be easily extended to describe circuits with more than two ports or several modes of propagation.
Page 122 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results ● is the reverse transfer admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, V = 0). ● is the output admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
Page 123 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results The notation for wave quantities is as follows: ● "a Src Port j" denotes the wave incoming at DUT port i, when DUT port j is stimula- ted. is detected at the reference receiver of the VNA port connected to DUT port i. ●...
Page 124 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Figure 4-8: More Wave Quantities dialog The following detectors are available: ● "Normal" selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point.
Page 125 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results Combining different detectors The detector setting in the More Ratios menu applies to both the numerator and the denominator wave quantity. To allow for different detector settings, measure the numer- ator and denominator wave quantities individually and use trace functions to calculate the ratio.
Page 126 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results ● The measurement is not impaired by the non-ideal characteristics of the balun (e.g. error tolerances, limited frequency range). ● Calibration can be performed at the DUT's ports. If necessary (e.g. to compensate for the effect of a test fixture), it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.
Page 127 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results ence impedances for the differential and common mode at each balanced port. Both steps can be done in a single "Balanced Ports" dialog. The most commonly used bal- anced port configurations and impedances are predefined and can be selected in the "S-Parameter Wizard".
Page 128 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results If <mout> is different from <min>, the S-parameters are called mode conversion fac- tors. Mixed-mode parameters for different test setups Which types of mixed mode parameter are available depends on the measured device and the port configuration of the analyzer.
Page 129 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR). It can be calculated as |S |/|S | (see dd21 cc21 Section 4.3.6.2, "Mixed-mode parameters", on page 127). The general definition of the complex CMRR between two ports (at least one of them balanced) is given below. Imbalance and common-mode rejection ratio can only be measured if more than 2 test ports are available on the VNA and connected switch...
Page 130 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Measurement results 4.3.7 Stability factors The stability factors K, μ1 and μ2 are real functions of the (complex) S-parameters, defined as follows:             ...
Page 131 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces f = frequency in Hz In practice, the analyzer calculates an approximation to the derivative of the phase response, taking a small frequency interval Δf and determining the corresponding phase change ΔΦ. The group delay is computed as ...
Page 132 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces ● An upper limit line defines the maximum allowed values for the related stimulus range. ● A lower limit line defines the minimum allowed values for the related stimulus range. ● A ripple limit defines the maximum difference between the largest and the smallest response value for the related stimulus range.
Page 133 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces As a consequence of the limit line rules, a DUT always passes the limit check if no limit lines are defined. Formula-defined limit lines A limit line doesn't have to be straight. You can also use a custom formula to define it. When the sweep axis is changed from linear frequency sweep to logarithmic sweeps, straight limit lines are transformed into exponential curves.
Page 134 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized. To facilitate the interpretation, the R&S ZNB3000 displays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion (the "tighter"...
Page 135 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Section 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 132). 4.4.1.3 Circle limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi-...
Page 136 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram (Z = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the impedance (Im(Z), reactance) falls below a limit.
Page 137 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit.
Page 138 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces 4.4.1.4 File format for limit lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...
Page 139 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 4.4.1.5 File format for ripple limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
Page 140 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces ● When exporting traces to a file, it is recommended to set the analyzer to single sweep mode (Channel – [Sweep] > "Sweep Control" > "All Channels on Hold"). This mode ensures that a complete sweep is exported. ●...
Page 141 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces # <frequency unit> <parameter> <data format> R <reference resistance> ● # indicates the beginning of the option line ● <frequency unit> can be either Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz. Default is GHz. The R&S ZNB3000 always uses HZ for exported data.
Page 142 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated. For "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" export format, it is represented as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM The other export formats "Version 1.1"...
Page 143 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces ● "Version 1.1" and "Version 2.0" export formats These export formats always use single-ended identifiers Sij and port numbers 1 to n in the table header. ! freq[Hz] S11[Re] S11[Im] ... The mapping between nominal (single-ended) and actual –...
Page 144 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way. During "Version 2.0" export, the R&S ZNB3000 writes the following key- words to the generated Touchstone file: Keyword Example Description...
Page 145 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces The following general rules apply: ● Individual entries in a network data line are separated by whitespace ● In version 1.1 files, no more than four parameters are allowed per network data line.
Page 146 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces Data format Frequencies are represented as single positive numbers, network parameter data as pairs of numbers. The <frequency unit> and <data format> are specified in the Option line. Numbers can be represented as decimal integers or floating point num- bers, with "."...
Page 147 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces If the impedances of all involved ports are identical, the analyzer sets the <reference resistance> in the Option line to the real part of this impedance. Otherwise it sets it to 50 (Ω). ●...
Page 148 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces formats lin. Mag-Phase or dB Mag-Phase. The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog. The trace data is arranged as described in the header. Different values are separated by semicolons, commas or other characters, depending on the selected "Decimal Sep- arator"...
Page 149 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Operations on traces Memory-mapped trace data transfer is a pure remote control feature. Once set up, the VNA firmware refreshes the shared memory trace data with every sweep. Other pro- cesses can read these data via standard APIs for Windows Named Shared Memory that are available for various programming languages.
Page 150 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Delete a shared memory buffer To delete a shared memory buffer and free the occupied memory, you can use one of the following commands. SYSTem:DATA:MEMory:DELete '<ShMemName>' deletes a single shared memory buffer by name. SYSTem:DATA:MEMory:RESet deletes all shared memory buffers created using SYSTem:DATA:MEMory:COMMit.
Page 151 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure are stored on the analyzer. You can read these correction data using the remote control command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa. You can also replace the correction data of the analyzer by your own correction data sets.
Page 152 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Table 4-7: Overview of calibration types Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection Normali- Open or Short for Port i Reflection tracking Low to medium Reflection measure- zation ments on any port. Transmission Nor- Through for port pair (i,j), i...
Page 153 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (equal at Reflection tracking, High Reflection and both ports), Match, transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through (between Directivity, cially in test fixtures. all port pairs) Load match, Transmission track-...
Page 154 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.1.1 Normalization (reflection, transmission) A normalization is the simplest calibration type since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each calibrated S-parameter: ● One-port (reflection) S-parameters (S , ...) are calibrated with an Open or a Short standard providing the reflection tracking error term.
Page 155 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration This calibration type requires a Short, an Open and a Match standard to be connected to a single test port plus a Through standard between this calibrated source port and the other load ports. The four standard measurements are used to derive the following error terms: ●...
Page 156 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration total number of standard measurements for an n-port TOSM calibration is 3n + n (n-1) = n (n+2). However, this number can be significantly decreased without losing too much precision (see Section 4.5.1.11, "Full n-Port calibration with reduced number of Through connections", on page 162).
Page 157 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Adapter Removal is an extension of the 2-port UOSM calibration. It requires two addi- tional reflection OSM calibrations with the adapter successively connected to port 1 and port 2. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 158 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Figure 4-9: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.
Page 159 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.1.8 TRM calibration A TRM (Through – Reflect – Match) calibration requires a low-reflection, low-loss Through standard with an electrical length that can be different from zero, a Reflect, and a Match. The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero;...
Page 160 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration To shift the calibrated sweep range to smaller or larger frequencies, you can use a lon- ger or shorter Line. To extend the calibrated range, use one of the following methods: ● Perform a multiline TRL calibration with more two or more Line standards. With an appropriate length of the Lines, the ratio for the start and stop frequency of the cali- brated sweep range can increase to approx.
Page 161 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Example: TRL calibration with two and three Lines If several Lines with different lengths are measured, the analyzer automatically divides the calibrated range into segments. The calibration data of the longest line is applied to the lowest segment, the calibration data of the shortest line to the highest segment.
Page 162 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Low-frequency extension with TRM TRL calibration becomes inaccurate if the electrical length difference between Line and Through standard corresponds to a phase shift below 20°. In practice, TRL is only practicable above a threshold frequency c /[18*(l –...
Page 163 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration [For the mathematically inclined: the graph constructed from the calibration ports as nodes and the measured Throughs as edges must be connected.] If an external switch matrix is configured and you want to calibrate three or more test ports that are all on the same submatrix, then an extra Through measurement is required: Complement the minimum set of n-1 Throughs (as explained above) by an additional Through at a port pair that is connected by a "chain of throughs"...
Page 164 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration (Transmission coefficient DUT – Isolation) / (Transmission coefficient Through – Isola- tion) There is no dedicated physical standard for isolation measurement; it is recommended to terminate the test ports suitably (e.g. with 50 Ω loads). 4.5.2 Calibration standards and calibration kits A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type.
Page 165 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset Model Load Model ☑ Through Through-connection with minimum loss (two-port) – – ☑ Line1, Line 2 Line standards for TRL calibration with minimum – – loss (two-port) Attenuation Fully matched standard in both directions (two- –...
Page 166 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The impedance for waveguides is frequency-dependent. If a waveguide line type is selected in the "Cal Connector Types" dialog, the "Char. Imp." field is disabled and indi- cates "varies" instead of a definite impedance value. Moreover no loss or offset loss can be set.
Page 167 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards. The parameter type is the same for all standards in a kit and therefore appended to the kit name: ● Universal parameters (no suffix) describe calibration kit models with highly stand- ardized components so that the parameters are valid for all calibration kits of the model.
Page 168 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The following additional parameters are used: ● Characteristic impedance: Z (characteristic impedance of the connector type) ● Loss: 0 dB / sqrt(GHz) or (0 GΩ / s) in Keysight mode ● All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero. 4.5.2.3 Sliding Match standards The Sliding Match is a one-port standard consisting of an air line with a movable, low-...
Page 169 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration A calibration is valid (and can be applied to the calibrated channel) if either the Match or three positions of the Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards. The R&S ZNB3000 can acquire correction data for up to 20 positions.
Page 170 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Importing older R&S ZVR cal kit files On loading some older R&S ZVR-specific *.ck files, e.g. the R&S ZV-Z23 cal kit file, the R&S ZNB3000 generates the message "File does not comply with instrument cali- bration kit file format".
Page 171 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Table 4-10: Calibration state labels (system error correction) Label Meaning The system error correction is applied without interpolation. This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point. Cal int The system error correction is applied, however, the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values.
Page 172 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
Page 173 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration ● RF connectors, which are connected to the test ports. For all Rohde & Schwarz calibration units except a customized R&S ZN-Z51, the connector types are equal for all ports. To connect the unit, 1.
Page 174 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The assignment between the analyzer ports and the cal unit ports can be detected automatically. If auto-detection fails (e.g. because of a high attenuation in the signal path), you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select "Set to Default Port Assignment".
Page 175 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Example: Select ports no. 1, 2, 3. A forward transmission normalization calibrates the S-parame- ters S , and S . A reverse transmission normalization calibrates the S-parame- ters S , and S . A bidirectional transmission normalization calibrates all six trans- mission S-parameters.
Page 176 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.5.4 Inline calibration Any disturbance of the measurement setup after the calibration process inevitably pro- duces errors. If a massive system error correction is required, e.g. if long RF cables with high damping are used, those disturbances can lead to inaccurate and unreprodu- cible measurement results.
Page 177 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Figure 4-12: ICC R&S ZN-Z30 For more information, see the R&S ZN-Z3x product pages at https://www.rohde- schwarz.com/product/NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3. Firmware integration The control connection between R&S ZNB3000 and ICC is established via USB. After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC, it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC.
Page 178 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Because the ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNB3000. The VNA firmware supports: ● Pulling characterization data for the connected ICUs from the ICC ●...
Page 179 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Step 1: OSM g) Step 2: Unknown Through 5. Connect the DUT to the calibrated setup and perform the required measurements. 6. Refresh the calibration in situ, whenever required. a) "Repeat" the calibration b) Perform OSM measurements.
Page 180 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The validation logic proceeds through the connected ports p ∈ {1, ..., 4} in ascending order, measuring S for the Open, Short and Match standard. It then compares the measured S values with the corresponding reflection S parameters of the cal unit's factory characterization.
Page 181 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.5.6 Multiple port assignments With multiple port assignments, you can calibrate port groups of any size, no matter how many ports your calibration unit (or cal unit characterization) has. For example, you can use a 2-port calibration unit to perform a full 4-port calibration. The multiple port assignment method considerably extends the range of applications of the calibration units.
Page 182 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Calibration Minimal solution Default solution (minimal) type Full One Port Each calibrated test port must appear in exactly one Subdivide the n test ports into port assignment. groups of m ports with increasing port numbers.
Page 183 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Table 4-13: Full 9-port calibrations: line-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1...
Page 184 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration In general, a power calibration involves three stages: Reference receiver calibration Connect an external power meter to the calibration plane and let the analyzer use power meter readings to calibrate its reference receiver. Source flatness calibration The analyzer modifies its source power so that the reading of the calibrated refer- ence receiver corresponds to the desired source power value.
Page 185 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration In a power sweep, the power calibration ensures that the power at the calibration plane is either constant or a linear function of the stimulus power. A typical application for a power calibration in a power sweep is the measurement of the gain of an amplifier across a power range but at a fixed frequency.
Page 186 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration A measurement receiver calibration generally improves the accuracy of power (wave quantity) measurements. The correction data acquired in a frequency or power sweep is reused if a "Time" or "CW Mode" sweep is activated. Calibration procedure The measurement receiver calibration is based on a received wave b with known...
Page 187 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Calibration of S-parameters S-parameters and derived quantities (e.g. impedances, admittances, stability factors) are assumed to be linear; otherwise they must be corrected by a SMARTerCal. Therefore, a scalar power calibration is not applied to S-parameters and derived quan- tities;...
Page 188 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.6.5 Extended test setups The power calibration data can be modified to account for an additional two-port device in the test setup. The known transmission coefficients of the two-port can be entered manually or loaded from a trace of the active VNA setup ([Cal] > "Power Cal Settings" >...
Page 189 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Practical example: An adapter or attenuator with known attenuation is needed to con- nect the power sensor to the test port of the network analyzer. The transmission coeffi- cients of the adapter are used for the power meter correction. 4.5.7 SMARTerCal A SMARTerCal (smarter calibration) is a combination of a "One Path Two Ports"...
Page 190 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration 4.5.7.2 Calibration types The names of the SMARTerCal calibration types consist of a prefix "P" (indicating the additional power calibration) plus the system error correction type. The R&S ZNB3000 supports the SMARTerCal equivalent of all full n-port system error corrections; an over- view is shown below.
Page 191 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration The calibration labels for a SMARTerCal consist of a prefix "S" plus the system error correction labels. Table 4-16: Calibration labels (SMARTerCal) Label Meaning SCal The SMARTer Cal is applied without interpolation. This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point.
Page 192 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Calibration Measurement System error correction Scalar Power calibration SMARTerCal Frequency conversion mea- Not possible surements on nonlinear DUTs --> Use SMARTerCal Power (source) and meas. receiver, sup- ported in combination with SMARTerCal SMARTerCal is a multiport calibration type. For one-port measurements, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including the measurement port.
Page 193 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6 Offset parameters and de-/embedding The R&S ZNB3000 functionality described in this section complements the calibration, compensating for the effect of known transmission lines or matching networks between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. 4.6.1 Offset parameters Offset parameters compensate for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the...
Page 194 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding In the limit case, where the length of the transmission line is considered to be "almost zero", the loss is considered constant: Otherwise, if the loss at DC and one additional frequency f is known (or measured), the loss at frequency f is approximated by: If in addition the loss at a second frequency f...
Page 195 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding This yields the delay for propagation in forward and reverse direction and should be approx. twice the "Auto Length" result. For transmission measurements, both results should be approx. equal. 2. Measure the reflection factor and select Trace – [Format] > "Phase". Place a marker to the trace and activate Trace –...
Page 196 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding "Auto Length and Loss" involves a two-step procedure: ● An "Auto Length" correction modifies the phase of the measured quantity, minimiz- ing the residual group delay. The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affec- ted.
Page 197 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.1.5 Fixture Compensation "Fixture Compensation" is an automated length offset and loss compensation for test fixtures. The analyzer performs a one-port reflection measurement at each port, assuming the inner contacts of the test fixtures to be terminated with an open or short circuit.
Page 198 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Using "Direct Compensation" together with „Open and Short” termination requires close-to-ideal "Open" and "Short" termination with the same length. In most cases, a higher accuracy can be achieved when measuring either "Open" or "Short". 4.6.1.6 Application and effect of offset parameters Offset and loss parameters can be particularly useful if the reference plane of the cali-...
Page 199 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.1.7 Offset parameters for balanced ports The offset parameters can be used for balanced port configurations: ● Offset parameters must be assigned to both physical ports of a logical port. ●...
Page 200 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Single-ended Balanced port port Balun Matching circuit The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT.
Page 201 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding To be numerically removed, the real network must be described by a set of S-parame- ters or by an equivalent circuit of lumped elements. Deembedding the DUT effectively extends the calibration plane towards the DUT ports, enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network.
Page 202 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt L, Serial L.
Page 203 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding parameters, or the entire transformation network can be described by imported 4-port S-parameters. The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported four-port Touch- stone file (*.s4p). No additional parameters are required. The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L and two serial elements, described by imported 2-port S-parameters.
Page 204 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Since FW version 1.93, the "capacitance C<i> in parallel with resistance R<i>" circuit blocks can alternatively be represented as "capacitance C<i> in parallel with conduc- tance G<i>" circuit blocks. 4.6.2.5 Port pair de-/embedding Port pair de-/embedding extends the functionality of balanced port de-/embedding to pairs of single-ended physical ports.
Page 205 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding The R&S ZNB3000 FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port set de-/embedding. 4.6.2.6 Port set de-/embedding The port set de-/embedding feature allows de-/embedding a linear 2m-port network connecting m physical VNA ports to m physical DUT ports (m≥2).
Page 206 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Section 4.6.2.5, "Port pair de-/embedding", on page 204.
Page 207 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.2.8 Differential match embedding Differential Match Embedding allows you to simulate the characteristics of balanced DUT ports whose differential mode is balance-unbalance converted and then connec- ted to a port-specific matching circuit. Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only...
Page 208 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Figure 4-14: Test setup for fixture deembedding Modeling process For all supported tools except Delta Cal, fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
Page 209 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 4-16: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
Page 210 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding Figure 4-18: Q-matrix ⋅ Q It calculates the fixture's Q-matrix as Q and then derives the S- fixture matrix from it. Delta Cal can only be used for single-ended DUTs. In a balanced or mixed-mode setup it is not available.
Page 211 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Offset parameters and de-/embedding The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single-ended deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2. Port Set Deembedding: every port set can be deembedded from one or more 4-, 6- or 8-port networks.
Page 212 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single-ended port embedding 4.7 Optional extensions and accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality. The equipped options are listed in the "Options"...
Page 213 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Option Option name R&S ZNB3-K100 SNP assistant R&S ZNB3-K210 Eazy de-embedding based on IEEE 370 R&S ZNB3-K220 In-situ de-embedding R&S ZNB3-K230 Smart fixture de-embedding R&S ZNB3-K231 Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization R&S ZNB3-K980 Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS) Permanent vs.
Page 214 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories switch matrices does not require any additional hardware or software options; it is described at the end of the chapter. 4.7.1 Frequency upgrade R&S ZNB3-B082/-B084 for 2-/4-port R&S ZNB3004 For each R&S ZNB3000 base unit, there is a dedicated frequency upgrade option increasing its upper frequency limit.
Page 215 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● For TDR traces and if distance is used as the x axis, the x value indicates the one- way path to the reflection. ● To export time domain traces, you have to use formatted values (ASCII, Matlab).
Page 216 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-21: Comparison of band pass and low pass modes Transform Band pass Low pass type Advantages Easiest to use: works with any set of equi- Higher response resolution (doubled) distant sweep points Includes information about DC value Real result...
Page 217 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-22: Properties of standard frequency windows Window Side lobe sup- Relative impulse Best for... pression width No Profiling (Rect- 13 dB – angle) Low First Side lobe 43 dB Response resolution: separation of (Hamming) closely spaced responses with compara-...
Page 218 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Visualization of the harmonic grid algorithms The R&S ZNB3000 provides three different algorithms for harmonic grid calculation. The three harmonic grids have the following characteristics: ● Keep "Stop Frequency and Number of Points" means that the stop frequency and the number of sweep points is maintained.
Page 219 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories The harmonic grids cannot be calculated for any set of sweep points. If the minimum number of sweep points is smaller than 5, then the interpolation/extrapolation algorithm for additional sweep points does not work. The same is true if the number of sweep points or stop frequency exceeds the upper limit.
Page 220 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Window Side lobe Passband Best for... suppression ripple Normal Gate 32 dB 0.032 dB Good compromise between edge steepness (Hann) and side lobe suppression Maximum Flat- 46 dB 0 dB Maximum attenuation of responses outside the ness (Bohman) gate span...
Page 221 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.2.6 Time domain S measurements VSWR The vector network analyzer R&S ZNB3000 with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR measurements. For the frequency range 1 GHz to 18 GHz, this method of S measurement is pro- VSWR posed in standard ANSI C63.25.
Page 222 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories TD S Calculation VSWR The ANSI time-domain method relies on a complex transmission measurement (S using a vector network analyzer (VNA). A time-domain transformation of the frequency domain data shows the impulse response between the two antennas.
Page 223 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-20: Eye diagram (NRZ modulated) The analyzer proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a frequency sweep. 2. Calculate the impulse response based on the results of the preceding frequency sweep. 3.
Page 224 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-21: Eye diagram result info field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing.
Page 225 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● Opening Factor This result is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye open- ing. Accordingly, it is equal to (("Eye Top" - σ ) - ("Eye Base" + σ )) / "Eye Amplitude"...
Page 226 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-23: Rise time measurement Skew measurement The skew measurement allows you to compare the step responses calculated from dif- ferent traces measured on the same analyzer channel. The skew is calculated as the "delta time"...
Page 227 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.3 Distance-to-fault measurements Option R&S ZNB3-K3 With option R&S ZNB3-K3 "Distance-to-Fault", the R&S ZNB3000 can locate faults and discontinuities on cables and transmission lines. Faults produce peaks on the impulse response (in the time domain) that is calculated from the measured reflection S-parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation.
Page 228 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories However, a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu- tion. The R&S ZNB3000 can automatically determine a suitable number of sweep points for a given maximum distance to fault ("Auto Number of Points"). Moreover it is possible to define which of the peaks are considered as being due to a fault, and to draw up and export a list of the detected faults.
Page 229 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Before measuring, the port frequencies must be set appropriately. In the port configura- tion table (Channel – [Channel Config] > "Port Config" > "Port Settings..." > "Arb Fre- quency"), the (source) frequency of Port 1 is set to the desired RF frequency (here: the channel base frequency/sweep range f ).
Page 230 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories = |RF – LO|). Filtering can be used to select one of these IF outputs and reject the unwanted one. Meaning of S-parameters The frequency-converting property of the mixer (i.e. the fact that incident and transmit- ted waves are at different frequencies) causes a loss of phase information.
Page 231 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories A test setup with two mixers requires 3 independent source ports plus one receive port. An instrument with two internal sources requires one external generator, all other instruments require two external generators. A standard mixer measurement with a single mixer stage and no frequency multipliers corresponds to the figure above with the second mixer and LO 2 omitted and m = 1.
Page 232 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), frequency sweep range (or fixed frequency, if the LO signal is swept), CW power, frequency con- version settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). –...
Page 233 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.4.3 Intermodulation measurements Option R&S ZNB3000-K14 The intermodulation measurement requires option R&S ZNB3-K14 and, as a prerequi- site, the Frequency conversion measurements option R&S ZNB3-K4. The "Intermodulation Wizard" facilitates the measurement configuration and the selec- tion of results (see Section 5.12.4, "Intermodulation tab",...
Page 234 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone The lower tone signal is generated at port 1, the upper tone is provided by the external generator. Both signals are combined externally and fed to the DUT input. The intermo- dulation quantities can be measured at the DUT output (transmitted wave b2).
Page 235 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Operation with more than one source is not supported, if External switch matrices part of the RF connection configuration. The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs. E.g., it is possible to feed the two-tone source signal to the RF input of a mixer and measure the intermodulation distortion of the IF output signal, after conversion with an additional LO signal.
Page 236 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 237 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Intermodulation quantities Intermodulation products A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal causes emissions at so-called intermodulation products, i.e. at sums and differences of the two frequencies and their integer multiples.
Page 238 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories for the intermodulation products of order O, we have and hence a distinction between "before mixer" and "after mixer" is not required. Intermodulation suppression and intercept points The intermodulation suppression IMk is the ratio of the power of an intermodula- tion product to the power of the lower tone fundamental wave in dB, measured at the DUT output.
Page 239 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.6 Gain compression measurements R&S ZNB3-K18 This option allows you to perform compression point over frequency measurements. For measurement configuration and results, see the description. 4.7.7 Frequency resolution 1 mHz Option R&S ZNB3-K19 This software option improves the frequency resolution of a R&S ZNB3000 to 1 mHz.
Page 240 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-26: Schematic showing the signal and noise powers relevant for noise figure calculations Based on this formulation the equation can be written in linear terms as: and S denote the signal power at the input and output of the DUT, respectively. and N represent the noise present at the input of the DUT and at the output of the DUT, respectively.
Page 241 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories source and a matched termination at the DUT input (typically a VNA port). The gain of the DUT is measured with an active source and the calibrated VNA receivers. Equivalent circuit The internal calculations are performed in the noise temperature representation.
Page 242 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Receiver noise temperature The noise that is present at the output of the DUT cannot be measured directly. In fact, the measured noise is always the sum of the noise emitting from the DUT and the noise present in the receiver.
Page 243 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories where ● is the noise power measured with the DUT connected to the VNA DUT,meas ● and T are the source and receiver noise temperature, respectively, deter- source mined during calibration ●...
Page 244 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Option R&S ZNB3-K50P offers the same functionality as option R&S ZNB3-K50, but comes with METAS VNA Tools preinstalled. It can be shipped with new instruments or installed at Rohde&Schwarz service. The purpose of the METAS VNA Tools software is to compute uncertainties of S- parameter measurements.
Page 245 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-29: S-parameter measurements with uncertainty bands Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) This model is provided by the analyzer firmware. ●...
Page 246 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Required to calculate the calibrated S-parameters and their uncertainties. If rele- vant settings are changed on the VNA, these changes are also propagated to the METAS VNA Tools. ● Measured S-parameters (uncalibrated) The raw ("uncalibrated") data are handed over to the METAS VNA Tools after every sweep for real-time correction and uncertainty analysis.
Page 247 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.10 SNP assistant R&S ZNB3-K100 The SNP Assistant (SNPA) makes the S-parameter characterization of multiport DUTs a breeze. Once you have declared the topology of your DUT and the sweep to be per- formed, the SNPA can initialize the DUT's S-parameters with plausible "idealized"...
Page 248 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-31: Step 2: Specify S-parameters to be measured/imported Figure 4-32: Step 3: Measure and/or import S-parameter data 4.7.11 Eazy de-embedding based on IEEE 370 Option R&S ZNB3-K210 EaZy deembedding (EZD) is an implementation of the IEEE algorithm for generating deembedding files from a symmetrical 2x Thru measurement.
Page 249 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories The EZD fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture. 2. Run the EZD tool to calculate the Touchstone files modeling the test fixture. The calculated sNp files can then be used to deembed the DUT at selected ports.
Page 250 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Section 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling and deembedding", on page 207. ● Option R&S ZNB3-K210 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde&Schwarz service.
Page 251 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Section 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling and deembedding", on page 207. ● For detailed information about the SFD tool, see the product pages at https:// www.packetmicro.com/Products/sfd-tool.html.
Page 252 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Option R&S ZNB3-K231 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde & Schwarz service. 4.7.15 Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS) Option R&S ZNB3-K980 The R&S ZNB3000 comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) pro- viding information about the R&S ZNB3000.
Page 253 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories For <interface> = snmp, you get a .zip file containing the MIB files for SNMP. For <interface> = rest, you get a web page with the OpenAPI specification of the REST API.
Page 254 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Limitations With two internal sources, the physical VNA ports are split into groups P1 = {1,2} and P2 = {3,4} such that source 1 can only drive ports in P1 and source 2 can only drive ports in P2.
Page 255 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Direct Control of Switch Matrices The Direct Control interface allows you to establish a direct connection between the VNA measurement bus and the FPGA controlling the routes of a switch matrix R&S ZN-Z8x.
Page 256 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● The external RFFE GPIO board R&S ZN-Z15 must be connected via Direct Con- trol, which in turn requires Device control option R&S ZNB-B12. ● There is no need to perform any kind of calibration or alignment of the extension board.
Page 257 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Analyzer Option Reduced minimum source power R&S ZNB3004, 2 ports R&S ZNB3-B22 -85 dBm (order no. 1351.5173.02) R&S ZNB3004, 4 ports R&S ZNB3-B24 (order no. 1351.5180.02) R&S ZNB3020, 2 ports R&S ZNB3-B22 -60 dBm (order no.
Page 258 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.26 Receiver step attenuators Options R&S ZNB3-B3n Various Options (see tables below) Receiver step attenuators are used to adjust the received signal levels to the input level range of the analyzer. The additional attenuation can prevent receiver compres- sion or damage, e.g.
Page 259 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories DC power measurement The DC power P supplied to the DUT can be measured using one or two of the four DC inputs DC INPUT 1...4 at the rear panel. The Power Added Efficiency (PAE) dialog suggests different measurement types, involving different test setups.
Page 260 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-28: PAE measurement types Measurement type / Input parameters / Circuit diagram Description Constant voltage source The DC power supply provides a constant voltage U ; a precision resistor R is connec- ted in series to the DUT.
Page 261 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.28 USB-to-IEC/IEEE adapter R&S ZVAB-B44 Hardware option R&S ZVAB-B44 (order no. 1302.5544.03) comprises an adapter and driver software for controlling external devices via IEEE 488 / IEC 625 (GPIB). The driver software is installed on the network analyzer.
Page 262 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection From VNA (e.g. USB) source port Power meter / sensor Power calibration plane External power meters must be configured with their connection type and device address before they are available as additional receivers (System – [~Setup] > "Exter- nal Devices"...
Page 263 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.30 External generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNB3000 can serve different pur- poses. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port. External generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT.
Page 264 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator External generators must be configured in the System – [~Setup] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNB3000, e.g.
Page 265 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the REF IN connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
Page 266 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ports can reduce or even eliminate the manual reconnections of the DUT, resulting in a higher measurement speed, reliability and repeatability. The firmware of the R&S ZNB3000 is able to control switch matrices from Rohde & Schwarz directly.
Page 267 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Switch matrices are global resources: their configuration is not part of a recall set. However, a recall set contains information about the required matrices and their RF connections. At the time the recall set is loaded, the R&S ZNB3000 checks whether the same matrix setup is still active.
Page 268 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Example: The 4x24 extension of switch matrix R&S ZN-Z84 consists of 2 separate 2x12 subma- trices. Matrix VNA ports of the "left" submatrix cannot be connected to the test ports of the "right"...
Page 269 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ZV-Z82-16 Figure 4-38: ZV-Z82-16: limited connectivity 4.7.31.4 Multiple paths: precision vs. speed A switch matrix can offer multiple routes to a given matrix test port. Hence, measure- ments can be performed using different physical paths, where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes.
Page 270 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 4-39: ZV-Z81 routes and priorities Example: For an R&S ZN-Z8x, each route traverses exactly one of the equipped 2x6 modules. The overall route quality is determined by the number of electronic solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module: 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes...
Page 271 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories For every supported switch matrix, the available routes are prioritized according to the number of switches they traverse (the rectangles in Figure 4-39). ● To obtain the highest measurement precision, the driving port uses the "best possi- ble"...
Page 272 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Route 1 Route 2 ● 2 paths per transmission measurement for a 2-port VNA: 2-port VNA Route 1 Route 2 ● 4 paths per transmission measurement for an N-port VNA with N≥4 User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 273 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories 4-port VNA Route Route Route Route This kind of "multipath calibration" offers the following additional benefit: During manual calibration, the measured reflection/transmission coefficients are pre- sented as memory traces – one per path. By comparing these traces, it can be possi- ble to track down hardware problems (cables, connectors, matrix, ...) already during calibration.
Page 274 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories ses imposed by the backward path through the calibration unit can result in poor signal to noise ratios. Recommended channel settings during calibration The straightforward countermeasure against poor signal to noise ratios during calibra- tion is to increase the stimulus power and to reduce the measurement (IF) bandwidth.
Page 275 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-42: Optimized port assignment for 6-port R&S ZN-Z154 If your measurement setup contains VNA ports that are not connected to a switch matrix, it is recommended to include (at least) one of them in the calibration. In the optimized port assignment, it is used as the source port for all passive load match measurements, and as the common port for all (unknown) Through measurements during calibration.
Page 276 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories If, even with "Recommended channel settings during calibration" on page 274 and opti- mized port assignment, you are not confident with the measurement results: ● Try out a calibration unit with fewer ports (fewer switches) R&S ZN-Z5x, R&S...
Page 277 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories With one power supply channel connected to the amplifier’s gate, and another channel connected to the amplifier’s drain, the measurement could proceed as follows: 1. At the beginning of the sweep, the power supply is initialized (e.g. voltage setting and current limit for each power supply channel) and then switched ON.
Page 278 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories This position allows maximum flexibility, because: ● The trace calculation chain is limited to one input for one output ● The position allows the plugin to use the results of the averaging step, and the trace data is calculated in the same way as for other calculation steps ●...
Page 279 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-44: Instrument selection For information on installation and licensing, see the R&S ZNXSIM Getting Started manual available at https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/ZNXSIM. 4.7.33.1 Simulation data The firmware simulation displays traces. To this end, it loads simulation data from one or more files, by default from C:\Program Files\Rohde-Schwarz\Vector Network Analyzer\ZNB\ Resources\Simulation\Measurements\...
Page 280 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories N columns N rows Figure 4-45: S-matrix replication By default, the firmware simulation applies InputBufferGroupSimulation.s4p to all channels in all setups. For each setup in the firmware simulation, you have three possibilities to define and refine the simulated DUT.
Page 281 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB3000 Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-46: Simulation noise ● Since version 3.40 of the analyzer firmware, simulation noise can be activated or deactivated from the analyzer GUI. Section 5.14.6, "More tab", on page 711. ●...
Page 282 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Function keys and softtools 5 GUI reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened via the keys on the front panel of the analyzer, via the on-screen Hardkey panel...
Page 283 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Function keys and softtools Table 5-1: Function keys and softtools (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action Trace – [Meas] Alt + Shift + A Meas softtool default Trace – [Format] Alt + Shift + B Format softtool default Trace –...
Page 284 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action System – [Print] Ctrl + P File softtool Opens the Print tab (virtual "Hard Key" panel only) System – [Display] Alt + Shift + S Display softtool default System –...
Page 285 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.1.1 Controls on the S-Params tab S-Parameter (selector) Selects an S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Single-ended (unbalanced) S-parameters are referred to as S<out>< in>, where <out> and <in> denote the output and input logical port numbers, respectively. If entered manually, <out>...
Page 286 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool All S-Params With the active logical ports distributed to m DUTs with n , ..., n ports, respectively, the analyzer creates n + ... + n diagrams and displays the full set of S-parameters, one in each diagram.
Page 287 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The wizard proceeds in the following steps: 1. Select the test setup. Choose the port setup of the analyzer according to the port configuration of your DUT. Then connect the DUT to the selected analyzer ports. This step corresponds to the "Predefined Config"...
Page 288 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5. Select the measurement bandwidth and source power. Choose a typical measurement bandwidth and one of three typical source power values. A smaller measurement bandwidth increases the dynamic range but slows down the measurement. If necessary, select a smaller source power to protect the input port of the analyzer.
Page 289 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.3.6, "Unbalance-balance conversion", on page 125 ● Section 4.3.6.1, "Balanced port configurations", on page 126 ● Section 4.3.2, "Reference impedances", on page 115 Predefined Config tab The "Predefined Config"...
Page 290 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Logical Port Config tab The "Logical Port Config" tab of the "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to configure logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) and to disable unused physical ports in the active channel. This tab is only visible if more than 4 ports are available (on the VNA and/or connected switch matrices).
Page 291 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ● To number the logical ports in line with the physical ports, select "Identity 1-1" For balanced ports, the lower of the two physical port numbers is selected. ● To number the logical ports consecutively from top to bottom, select "Aligned 1,2,3..."...
Page 292 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Reference Impedance tab The "Reference Impedance" tab of the "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to define (or redefine) the impedances of the logical ports. Background information Refer to Section 4.3.2, "Reference impedances", on page 115.
Page 293 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Figure 5-2: Reference Impedance Tab (>4 physical ports) By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances).
Page 294 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Single Ended Mode / Common Mode / Differential Mode Defines arbitrary reference impedances. "Single Ended Mode" is available for single-ended logical ports only, "Common Mode" and "Differential Mode" impedances for balanced ports only. The default values for the balanced port reference impedances are derived from the (real) default reference impedance Z = 50 Ω...
Page 295 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.2.1 Controls on the Ratios tab The "More Ratios..." button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities. b<i> / a<j> Source Port <j> Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2-port wave quantities a , and...
Page 296 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "B2/A1" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "B2/A1" | ... 5.2.2.2 More Ratios dialog The More Ratios dialog allows you to select arbitrary ratios between wave quantities b as measured quantity. The ratios can be calculated with arbitrary source port and dif- ferent detector settings.
Page 297 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Denominator Selects the type (left pull-down list) and the port number assignment (right pull-down list) of the wave that forms the denominator of the ratio. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "B2/A1" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "B2/A1"...
Page 298 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.3.1 Controls on the Wave tab The "More Wave Quantities..." button opens the More Wave Quantities dialog which allows to select an arbitrary wave quantity, e.g. for different source ports or higher port numbers.
Page 299 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Tip: In the trace list, the source port is indicated in brackets. For example, "a1(P1)" denotes the wave a with source port 1. The analyzer can also measure arbitrary wave quantities for other source ports; see Section 5.2.3.2, "More Wave Quantities dialog", on page 299.
Page 300 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... Use Generator as Source If enabled, the "Port" control lists the configured external generators. Otherwise it lists the analyzer ports. To configure external generators, use the "External Generators" dialog. See Sec- tion 4.7.30, "External generators",...
Page 301 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.4 Intermod tab Selects intermodulation products and derived results as measured quantities. The intermodulation products occur at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples. The intermodulation measurement requires options R&S ZNB3-K4 and R&S ZNB3- K14.
Page 302 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ... at DUT Out/In Note: The measurement of higher-order intermodulation products must be enabled explicitly in the "Define Intermodulation" dialog, see Section 5.12.4.3, "Define Intermo- dulation Distortion Measurement dialog", on page 607. ● The "Lower IM3 Product at DUT Out"...
Page 303 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Order Defines the order of the intermodulation product. Note that measuring a particular order must be prepared in the intermodulation chan- nel setup (see Section 5.12.4, "Intermodulation tab", on page 602). Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Side...
Page 304 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Background information Refer to "Intermodulation quantities" on page 237. Order Defines the order of the intercept point. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Side Defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones. "Major"...
Page 305 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ters, the converted capacitances, inductances and resistances from the converted impedances. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.3.3, "Impedance parameters", on page 117 ● Section 4.3.3.1, "Converted impedances", on page 117 Z←S<out><in>...
Page 306 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ● is the input impedance at port 2 of a 2-port DUT that is terminated at port 1 with the reference impedance Z (matched-circuit impedance measured in a reverse reflection measurement). ● and Z denote the forward and reverse converted transfer impedances, respectively.
Page 307 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "C-S12" | "C-S12SER" | "C-S12PAR" | "C-S12SHUNT" | ... | "L-S12" | "L-S12SER" | "L-S12PAR" | "L-S12SHUNT" | ... | "R-S12" | "R-S12SER" | "R-S12PAR" | "R-S12SHUNT" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "C-S12"...
Page 308 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S12" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S22" | ... Y←S<out><in> softkeys Selects the 2-port converted admittance parameters. The parameters describe the admittances of a 2-port DUT, obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflec- tion measurements: ●...
Page 309 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.7 Y-Z-Params tab Allows you to select Y- and Z-parameters as measured quantities. Both Y- and Z- parameters can serve as an alternative to S-parameters for characterizing a linear n- port network. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 310 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
Page 311 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The "Imbal. CMRR" measurements require at least two logical ports, at least one of them balanced. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.3.6, "Unbalance-balance conversion", on page 125 ● Section 4.3.6.3, "Imbalance and common mode rejection", on page 128 5.2.8.1...
Page 312 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Imb21/Imb12/CMRR21/CMRR12 Selects one of the standard 2-port imbalance or CMRR parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. The buttons are available if either logical port 1 or logical port 2 (or both) is defined as a balanced port. A yellow font color indicates that currently the other logical port number is undefined and the physical port with the same number is marked as unused.
Page 313 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ● Physical Port 1 and Physical Port 2 represent the two single-ended test ports: any two (active) single-ended logical ports can be selected ● The part below allows you to select the signal direction and hence the "Imbalance Result"...
Page 314 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Stability Selects a stability factor as a measured quantity for the active trace. The stability factor calculation is based on 2-port reflection and transmission S-parameters so that the input and output port numbers must be different. The pull-down list contains all possi- ble physical (single-ended) port combinations.
Page 315 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.10 Power Sensor tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors. The standard test setup for a "Power Sensor" measurement involves one analyzer source port and a power sensor. The power sensor is connected to the VNA (e.g. to the analyzer's USB port) and provides scalar wave quantity results.
Page 316 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The bordered label below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure 'TraceName', 'PmtrD1 | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'TraceName', 'PmtrD1 | ... Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the selected power meter. The power meter must be disconnected from the RF power;...
Page 317 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.11.1 Controls on the DC tab The "PAE..." button opens the Power Added Efficiency dialog. DC 1/DC 2/DC 3/DC 4/Source Port Selects a DC INPUT and the drive port for the active trace. The DC voltages "DC 1", ..., "DC 4"...
Page 318 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]DC<DCInp>:RANGe 5.2.11.2 Power Added Efficiency (PAE) dialog The "Power Added Efficiency (PAE)" dialog configures the measurement of the PAE of an active 2-port device. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "DC" > "PAE..." Background information Refer to section Section 4.7.27.1, "Power added...
Page 319 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 4. Close the "Power Added Efficiency (PAE)" dialog and observe the result in the measurement diagram. Measurement Type Selects the PAE measurement type, depending on the DC power source in use: ● DC source providing a constant, known voltage at (possibly) variable current ●...
Page 320 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.12 Noise Figure tab Replicates the content on the NF Meas tab of the Noise Figure application. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "Noise Figure" Noise figure measurement is provided with software option R&S ZNB3-K30. If this option is not installed, the "Noise Figure"...
Page 321 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The gain compression measurement performs a power sweep (defined by Start Power/ Stop Power/Power Points) for a linear frequency grid (defined by Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency "Number of Points"...
Page 322 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ear part is large compared to the compression part, a large part of the measurement time is wasted for irrelevant power points. If you enable Skip Linear Sweep Section, then for frequency f the firmware skips all power sweep points between start power and P ) –...
Page 323 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool ● either at the compression point p (f), if the configured Compression Value comp can be reached ● or at the terminating point p (f) of the power sweep. term So if gc can be reached, then in dB magnitude ΔS (f) = ΔS(f, p (f), p ) = gc,...
Page 324 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Source Port/Receive Port Selects the driving and receiving port for the gain compression measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:SRCPort [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:RECeiver Start Power/Stop Power/Power Points Defines the start power, stop power, and number of points of the power sweeps that are performed at each point on the linear frequency grid defined using Start Fre- quency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span...
Page 325 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.14.1 Controls on the External DLL tab Configuration / Perm. Settings Opens the External DLL Configuration dialog. Measurement The "Measurement" section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug-ins. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a measurement button "<ext_dll_name>"...
Page 326 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool Loaded DLLs table Displays the loaded plug-in DLLs and their configuration in the current channel. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST? Active ← Loaded DLLs table Allows you to de-/activate the respective plugin in the current channel. An active plugin can be used to create traces and/or can be made Permanent.
Page 327 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool The firmware must be run as administrator to add or remove custom plugins. Once installed, standard user privileges are sufficient to use a plugin's functionality. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:ADD [SENSe:]CDLL:REMove Configure Device Adress Opens an additional dialog that allows you to specify the addresses of external devices the external DLL requires to complete its tasks.
Page 328 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Meas softtool 5.2.14.3 Trace Definition dialog Specifies a custom trace that is provided by an external DLL. Access: External DLL tab > "Measurement" section buttons Figure 5-3: Trace Definition dialog In the VNA firmware, the following string represents the measured quantity: Cu(P<Src Port>)<lowercase_ext_dll_name>/<Task Type>/<Additional Input>...
Page 329 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool The "Additional Input" is the last part of the trace identifier: Cu(P<Src Port>)<lowercase_ext_dll_name>/<Task Type>/<Additional Input> 5.3 Format softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area.
Page 330 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool dB Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a dB scale of the vertical axis to display the magni- tude of the complex measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e.
Page 331 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat SMITh Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio. Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
Page 332 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool Unwr Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with an arbitrarily scaled linear vertical axis to display the phase of the measured quantity. Properties: ● The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e.
Page 333 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool Real Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The real part Re(C) of the complex quantity C = Re(C) + j Im(C), appears on the vertical axis, also scaled linearly.
Page 334 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Format softtool Properties: The group delay τ represents the propagation time of wave through a device. τ is a real quantity and is calculated as the negative of the derivative of its phase response. A non-dispersive DUT shows a linear phase response, which produ- ces a constant delay (a constant ratio of phase difference to frequency difference).
Page 335 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Scale softtool New markers are formatted with the trace's "Dflt Marker Frmt"; existing markers are reformatted if (and only if) their Marker Format is set to (Trace) "Default". For background information on marker formats, see "Marker format"...
Page 336 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Scale softtool Relations between the scaling parameters The scaling parameters "Scale/Div""Ref Value", "Ref Pos", "Max", and "Min" are cou- pled together in the following manner: ● "Max" – "Min" = "Scale/Div" · <Number of graticule divisions> ●...
Page 337 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Scale softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision Ref Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram. ● In Cartesian diagrams "Ref Value" defines the value of the reference line, indicated by an arrowhead symbol at the right edge of the diagram area.
Page 338 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Scale softtool 5.4.2 Scale Coupling tab Selects common scale settings for all traces. The softkeys are available if the active recall set contains at least two traces, and if the active trace is not a reference trace ("To Trace").
Page 339 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Scale softtool angle, but at the same time narrows the sweep range of the active channel to the rec- tangle's horizontal range. Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 340 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool You can define the zoom area using touchscreen or mouse. To modify the zoom win- dow in graphical zoom mode, you can also use the numerical input fields "Max", "Min", "Start", and "Stop". Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset...
Page 341 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.1.3, "Traces, channels and diagrams", on page 77 ● Section 3.3.5, "Handling diagrams, traces, and markers", on page 55 In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other;...
Page 342 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate:PARameter:MOVE Diagram Allows you to move the Active Trace to another diagram. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED Active Memory Selects one of the memory traces of (or related to) the active trace as its (or its parent data trace's) active memory trace.
Page 343 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool "Delete Trace" is disabled if the active recall set contains only one trace. In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace. Tips: ●...
Page 344 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool After the button has been dropped, the "New Trace" dialog pops up and lets you select the quantity to be measured. 5.5.1.3 Trace Manager dialog The "Trace Manager" dialog allows you to perform operations on traces. Access: Trace –...
Page 345 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● "Type" indicates whether the trace is a data trace ("DAT"), displaying the current measurement data, or a memory trace ("MEM"). ● "Channel" indicates and controls the channel to which the related trace is assigned. Data traces and their associated memory traces are always assigned to the same channel.
Page 346 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Delete Deletes the selected trace. This button is disabled if the recall set contains only one trace: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Couple All Channels / Decouple All Channels...
Page 347 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...
Page 348 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Data to <Destination> Stores the current state of the active data trace to the Destination memory trace. No trace functions are applied to the stored trace. Tips: ● Data & Func to <Destination> to apply trace functions to the stored trace.
Page 349 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Show <Mem> Shows or hides the active memory trace or the first memory trace of the active data trace. If no memory trace is associated with the active data trace, "Show <Mem>" is disabled. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW 5.5.3 All Mem All Data tab...
Page 350 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Destination Selects the destination for the All Data to <Destination> All Data & Func to <Desti- nation> functions, that operate on all data traces in the active recall set. ●...
Page 351 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool 5.5.4.1 Controls on the Math tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
Page 352 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool "Trace Math" is enabled if the active data trace fulfills the conditions for evaluating the mathematical relation. E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNB3000 can evaluate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>"...
Page 353 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces. They are calculated on a point-to-point basis. Each trace point no. i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c , ..., c plus the...
Page 354 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool The effect of the basic arithmetic operators (/, *, –, +) and the mathematical – functions is described in Table 5-2. Products of numbers and constants can be entered in abbreviated form, e.g. 2e for 2*e.
Page 355 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool mat), Result is Wave Quantity must be enabled. Note that, due to the conversion into a dBm value, the source power depends on the reference impedance of the port associated with the measured wave quantity, to be set in the "Balanced Ports" dialog.
Page 356 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Example: A mathematical trace value amounts to 1 (real value); the port impedance is 50 Ω. If "Result is Wave Quantity" is on, the analyzer assumes the trace value to be 1 V, which is converted into a linear power of 20 mW, corresponding to approx.
Page 357 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq"...
Page 358 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool See also Section 4.7.2.1, "Chirp z-transformation", on page 215. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe Type Selects a bandpass or lowpass time domain transform. See Section 4.7.2.2, "Band pass and low pass mode", on page 215. To calculate a lowpass transform, the sweep points must be on a harmonic grid.
Page 359 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Gaussian Smooth Factor Defines the smoothness factor of a Gaussian window. Table 4-23. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:GAUSsian Exponential Smooth Factor Defines the smoothness factor of an exponential window. Table 4-23. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:EXPonential Causal Rise Time Defines the rise time for the causal rise time window.
Page 360 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Show Impulse Response... To get an impression of the required Gate Span, you can quickly create a trace display- ing the impulse response of the active trace in a new diagram. This button is only enabled if TD-VSWR is active.
Page 361 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic? Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points. ● Keep "Stop Frequency and Number of Points" calculates a harmonic grid based on the current "Stop Frequency"...
Page 362 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● If the properties of the DUT at f = 0 are sufficiently well known, then it is recom- mendable to enter the DC value manually ("Manual Entry"). Examples: At f = 0 the reflection factor of an open-ended cable is 1. It is –1 for a short-circuited cable and 0 for a cable with matched termination.
Page 363 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Time Gate Enables or disables the time gates of the active trace. "Gat" is displayed in the trace list while the time gate is active. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe Selected Time Gate Selects a time gate for configuration purposes. Add Time Gate Delete Time Gate to add/delete time gates to/from the active...
Page 364 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Axis Pair "Start Stop" lets you define the Selected Time Gate via its "Start" and "Stop", "Center Span" lets you define it via its "Center" and "Span" value (in time). The analyzer generates a warning if the (resulting) time span exceeds the unambigu- ous range which is given by Δt = 1/Δf, where Δf is the "Freq Step Size".
Page 365 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Time Gate Linking Opens a dialog that allows you to link the time gates of the traces in the active channel, i.e. to align the time gate setting across linked (~coupled) traces. "Link All"...
Page 366 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool 5.5.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Sec- tion 5.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog", on page 370). The "Decimal Places..." button opens the "System Config" dialog to define the (maxi- mum) number of fractional digits for setting values and measurement results.
Page 367 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool       ● "RMS" is the root mean square (effective value) of all response values:    i 1 Note: To calculate the "Min", "Max", "Pk-Pk" and the "Std Dev" values, the analyzer uses formatted response values y (see trace formats).
Page 368 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool        where Δf is the width of the evaluation range and ΔΦ is the corresponding phase change. See also note on transmission and reflection parameters below. ●...
Page 369 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool For dB traces, the x dB compression point of an S parameter or ratio is defined as the stimulus level where the response value has dropped by x dB compared to the response value at small stimulus signal levels ("small signal value").
Page 370 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool "First Point" uses the value at the first point of the selected evaluation range as (default) the reference value (see Section 5.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog", on page 370). "Selected uses the value at a selectable marker as the reference value (see Marker"...
Page 371 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range. The trace statistics functions consider all measurement points with stimulus values x between the "Start"...
Page 372 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 381. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker values are calculated before Smoothing Hold...
Page 373 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Aperture Defines how many trace values are averaged to smooth the trace if Smoothing switched on. ∈ {1, ..., N} is replaced by An "Aperture" of a % means that the value at sweep point n the arithmetic mean of the values at sweep points ⌈...
Page 374 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Shift Trace Functions for shifting the active trace in horizontal and vertical direction. Stimulus ← Shift Trace Shifts the active trace in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged. The unit of the offset value depends on the sweep type. Note: A "Stimulus"...
Page 375 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool "Real" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Re(zr) "Imag" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Im(zr) "Complex" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – zr Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRACking:MODE CALCulate<Chn>:TRACking:SWEep:POINt 5.5.10 Infinite Averaging tab The controls on the "Infinite Averaging " tab allow you configure infinite averaging for the active trace.
Page 376 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.4.2, "Trace files", on page 139. All buttons on the "Trace Data" tab serve as "openers" for related dialogs: ● "Import..." calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file; see Sec- tion 5.5.11.1, "Import Complex Data dialog",...
Page 377 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.4.2, "Trace files", on page 139. On loading data from a trace file with several traces, the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file (see Section 5.5.11.3, "Select Param- eter dialog",...
Page 378 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● Trace – [Trace Config] > "Trace Data" > "Export" – ... Data export can serve many purposes, e.g.: ● To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application. ● To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 379 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Figure 5-5: ASCII Trace files export The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
Page 380 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Output Format Selects the format of the exported raw, complex measurement values. The exported values can be represented by the real and imaginary parts, the linear magnitude and phase, or dB magnitude and phase; see also "Formatted Values"...
Page 381 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:DECimals:STIMulus MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:DECimals:DATA Add Ref Impedances For ASCII (*.csv) or MATLAB (*.dat) files only: Includes the reference impedances for all analyzer ports in the file header. Formatted Values For ASCII (*.csv) or MATLAB (*.dat) files only: Selects the format for the exported trace data.
Page 382 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool ● The active trace shall be exported as formatted values. In this case, "Resample Settings" opens a dialog that allows you to select either the "Number of points" or the "Time Step Size": The "Number of Points"...
Page 383 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Trace Config softtool Select All / Deselect All During trace data import, selects/deselects all traces contained in the opened trace file. Auto Distribute Available for trace data import only. If enabled, a selected trace S is imported as a memory trace for all data traces in the current recall set that are measuring S Remote command:...
Page 384 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNB3000 checks the channel data for compatibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces;...
Page 385 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.4.1, "Limit check", on page 131. 5.6.1 Limit Test tab Defines limit lines for the measurement results (upper and lower limits), visualizes them in the diagrams and enables/disables the limit check. Limit lines are available for all Cartesian diagram types;...
Page 386 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (System > [Display] > "Config" > "Define User Color..."). You can choose between various options: ● Display upper and lower limit lines with different colors. ●...
Page 387 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool – If "Limit Check" is enabled, the limits are checked, no matter if the limit lines are displayed. – The limit check can even be enabled, if no limit lines are defined. In this case, the info field displays "No limit defined!"...
Page 388 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool ● "PASS" represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check. ● "FAIL" means that the limit check for one or more traces failed. Remote command: CALCulate:CLIMits[:STATe] CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
Page 389 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:X:OFFSet CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:Y:OFFSet 5.6.1.2 Define Limit Lines dialog The "Define Limit Lines" dialog defines the limit lines for the active trace on a segment- by-segment basis. For each segment, the limit is defined as a line connecting two points (with linear or logarithmic "Interpolation"), or as a user-defined formula.
Page 390 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment in the Segment List individually.
Page 391 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line. ●...
Page 392 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool In case the selected file contains more than one trace, another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one: Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n – 1, where n is the "Number of Points"...
Page 393 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines" dialog. Linear/Formula Allows you to decide how to define the line segment. ● "Linear": Define the line segment as a straight line, connecting the endpoints ("Start Stimulus","Start Response") and ("Stop Stimulus","Stop Response").
Page 394 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.4.1, "Limit check", on page 131. 5.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Sec- tion 5.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test dialog", on page 396).
Page 395 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Ripple Check Switches the ripple limit check of the active trace on or off. When the limit check is switched on, a movable info field shows the pass/fail information and the measured rip- ple in each ripple limit range.
Page 396 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar Global Check "Global Check" on page 387. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 388. 5.6.2.2 Define Ripple Test dialog The "Define Ripple Test" dialog defines the ripple limits for the active trace on a range- by-range basis.
Page 397 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Range List Defines the individual ripple limit ranges. The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each range plus the following editable columns: ● "Range On/Off" enables or disables the ripple limit check in each range. Disabling the ripple limit check does not delete the range but hides the entry in the info field.
Page 398 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Ripple limit files are ASCII files with the default extension *.ripple and a special file format. See Section 4.4.1.5, "File format for ripple limits", on page 139. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle 5.6.3 Circle Test tab Defines circular limit lines for complex trace formats ("Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"), vis- ualizes them in the diagram and activates/deactivates the circle limit check.
Page 399 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Sec- tion 5.16.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 795). You can choose between various options: ● Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines. ●...
Page 400 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool The appearance of the limit fail symbols is defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Section 5.16.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 795). You can choose between various options: ●...
Page 401 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool Radius / Center X / Center Y Defines the limit circle by its radius and its center on the X-axis and Y-axis. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA Global Check "Global Check" on page 387. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass"...
Page 402 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Lines softtool left ("FAIL") = "Circle Test" enabled, but not limited to "Display Circle" right ("PASS") = "Circle Test" enabled, but limited to "Display Circle" Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar...
Page 403 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNB3000's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position. The response value appears in the numeric entry field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe 5.7 Marker softtool...
Page 404 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr <i> Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
Page 405 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Section 5.7.2, "Marker Props tab", on page 406). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted. Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete"...
Page 406 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...
Page 407 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker format" on page 95. "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt.
Page 408 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool The marker can be moved freely inside the diagram, directly adjusting its X and Y coor- dinates. If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker's stimulus value is adjusted accordingly. Otherwise the marker's stimulus value remains unchanged and is not shown in the Marker info field.
Page 409 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool 5.7.3 Marker Search tab Provides "Marker Search" functions that move the active marker to a (local) maximum or minimum of the active trace. The search operation can be restricted to a configurable range of stimulus values ("Search Range...").
Page 410 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 423. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range, depending on the selected Peak Type.
Page 411 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool ● "Target Search", where typically only the horizontal position changes ● "Sweep Progress" for long duration sweeps Define an adequate "Search Range" to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power interval (see Section 5.7.3.2, "Search Range dialog", on page 411).
Page 412 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool The "Search Range"s are bordered by the "Start" and "Stop" values. "Start" must be smaller than "Stop", otherwise the second value is automatically adjusted. "Search Range" properties The 10 search ranges are valid for the entire recall set. Each of them can be assigned to any marker in the recall set, irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to.
Page 413 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool 5.7.3.3 Marker Config dialog The "Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the peak searches for the active trace and all its markers. Access: ● Trace – [Marker] > "Marker Search" > "Marker Config..." ●...
Page 414 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool If "Active", only peaks with an excursion above the configured "Excursion" value are considered. By definition, the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ- ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity. The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified.
Page 415 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Eval Range Opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to set the domain for the multiple peak search. A modified domain takes effect the next time Max / Min is used. Tracking Enables or disables tracking for "Multiple Peak"...
Page 416 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold:STATe Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for multiple peak searches and activates it. If "Active", only peaks with an excursion above the configured "Excursion" value are considered. By definition, the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ- ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity.
Page 417 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TARGet Target Format Selects the format that is used to specify the Target Value. The selected target format applies to the current marker only: each marker can have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
Page 418 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool If the search is successful, the active marker is moved to the next smaller/larger stimu- lus value with this target value. Use "Search Left"/"Search Right" repeatedly to locate the other ones. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult?
Page 419 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool The "Eval Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog that allows you to nar- row the "Bandfilter" search to a particular stimulus range. See Evaluation Range dia- log. Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks. ●...
Page 420 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool If "Bandpass Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandpass region. ● "M1" indicates the maximum of the peak ("Max"). ● "M2"...
Page 421 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool If "Bandstop Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandstop region. ● "M1" indicates the minimum of the peak ("Min"). ● "M2"...
Page 422 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool ● "Absolute Level:" The bandpass (bandstop) is the tallest (lowest) peak in the search range. To be valid, the peak must be above (below) -"Bandwidth". The Lower Band Edge and Upper Band Edge values are given by the frequencies where the trace is equal to -"Bandwidth".
Page 423 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker The following functions use the stimulus value of the active marker to define the sweep range. ● "Center = Marker" sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker, leaving the span unchanged.
Page 424 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Marker softtool A standard application of "Zero Delay at Marker" is correction of the constant delay caused by the interconnecting cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT (line stretch). Note: "Zero Delay at Marker" modifies the "Offset" parameters and therefore influen- ces the entire channel.
Page 425 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m> in one trace. The Marker <m>...
Page 426 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool ● While in Cartesian diagrams the x-axis represents the stimulus values, in polar and Smith diagrams this direct relation is lost. In any case, a marker can be used to dis- play the stimulus value of a given trace point. For "Time Domain"...
Page 427 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool ● Start Power / Stop Power Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" or "Center Fre- quency"...
Page 428 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool Stimulus Axis – Frequency / Power Selects the channel base frequency (power) or the frequency (power) of a particular port as the stimulus axis in all diagrams of the active recall set. The selected stimulus axis is displayed in the channel line.
Page 429 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Stimulus softtool Figure 5-8: Stimulus > Time Domain X-Axis softtool tab left = Time representation right = Distance representation Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation (see "Time / Distance"...
Page 430 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Power Bw Avg softtool "Distance Start" and "Distance Stop" or "Distance Center" and "Distance Span" are alternative settings. Remote command: n.a. Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span. Time / Distance "Time"...
Page 431 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Power Bw Avg softtool 5.9.1.1 Controls on the Power tab If the number of test ports (on the VNA and connected switch matrices) is higher than 4, the "Step Attenuators" input fields are hidden. They are replaced by a "Step Attenua- tors..."...
Page 432 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Power Bw Avg softtool If the number of test ports (on the VNA and connected switch matrices) is higher than 4, the "Step Attenuators" input fields are hidden. They are replaced by a "Step Attenua- tors..."...
Page 433 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Power Bw Avg softtool Segmented sweeps In segmented frequency sweeps, the filter settings can be selected independently for each segment. See Section 5.10.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 443. Bandwidth "Bandwidth" the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter. Within the value range, the entered value is rounded up to 1 ·...
Page 434 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Power Bw Avg softtool Effects of sweep averaging, alternative settings An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the mea- surement and therefore minimizes the noise level. The effect increases with the aver- age factor, however, obtaining an averaged result requires several sweeps and there- fore increases the measurement time.
Page 435 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool ● "Flatten Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the (linear) magnitude and phase values, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "dB Mag", "Phase", "Unwr. Phase", and "Lin Mag" formats. ● "Moving Average": Simple moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result;...
Page 436 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value), the maximum num- ber for frequency sweeps is 100001. Together with the sweep range defined in the Stimulus tab of the "Stimulus"...
Page 437 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:STEP Sweep Time / Auto Varies the measurement time for a sweep or delays the start of each sweep. ● "Sweep Time" is the total measurement time for the sweep. The minimum possible sweep time is equal to the estimated value in "Auto"...
Page 438 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:DWELl:IPOint 5.10.2 Sweep Type tab Defines the sweep variable (frequency/power/time) and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range. 5.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range.
Page 439 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
Page 440 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Due to this flexibility, segmented frequency sweeps are suitable for any detailed analy- sis of a DUT at specified frequencies. In a Cartesian diagram, the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale ranging from the lowest to the highest frequency point of all segments.
Page 441 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Section 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab", on page 426). The measurement is triggered according to the current trigger settings (see Sec- tion 5.10.3, "Trigger In...
Page 442 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Tip: Sweep time The minimum sweep time depends on the number of measurement points, the mea- surement bandwidth, the delay time before each partial measurement and the number of partial measurements required for each measurement point. The analyzer estimates this time, based on the current measurement settings.
Page 443 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Section 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 132. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS 5.10.2.2 Define Segments dialog The "Define Segments"...
Page 444 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Controls in the Define Segments dialog Table Columns The table in the upper part of the "Define Segments" dialog contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non-editable columns: ●...
Page 445 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STEP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list. The added segment covers a possible frequency gap between the preceding seg- ment and the upper frequency limit of the analyzer.
Page 446 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Figure 5-9: Point List Import.../ Export... The buttons open standard dialogs to import/export sweep segment settings to/from an ASCII file (*.SegList). ● "Import..." replaces the current segment list by a sweep segment list loaded from a *.SegList file.
Page 447 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Example: The segmented sweep is described by the following sweep segment file: Note: The *.SegList file actually contains more columns listing all channel settings of the individual sweep segments. The headings of the additional columns are IF Band- width [Hz], en:IF Selectivity, en:IF Sideband, Meas Delay [µs], bo:Sweep Time Auto,en:Frq Sweep Mode.
Page 448 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Optional Columns Each selected (enabled) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ● "Name" allows you to assign a name to each segment. A segment name is a string that is allowed to contain letters, numbers and special characters.
Page 449 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool ● "Meas Bandwidth" defines the IF filter bandwidth for each individual sweep seg- ment. See "Bandwidth" on page 433. ● "NF Virtual Img Rejection" allows you to activate or deactivate virtual image rejec- tion for individual sweep segments in noise figure channels.
Page 450 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool tings of the analyzer are changed and a new partial measurement is started. Changing the "Meas Delay" modifies the "Segment Time" and vice versa. "Auto" minimizes the sweep time. If "Auto" is selected for a segment, the columns "Segment Time"...
Page 451 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.1.4.1, "Partial measurements and driving mode", on page 80. 5.10.3.1 Controls on the Trigger In tab The trigger settings are also valid for calibration sweeps. Hence, in external trigger mode, the external trigger signal must be available during the system error correction, too.
Page 452 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool ● If "Multiple" is active, the trigger sources for different triggered measurement sequences, the trigger slope, and the trigger delay can be selected individually using the Trigger Manager dialog. In particular, it is possible to use different external trigger sources. Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal Manual...
Page 453 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Delay Specifies a delay time between the trigger event and the start of the next measurement sequence. The specified "Delay" must be zero or positive, so that the trigger event precedes the start of the measurement (post-trigger). If "Multiple"...
Page 454 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool The table in the "Trigger Manager" dialog contains several editable (white) or non-edit- able (gray) columns. For a description, see the single trigger settings on the Trigger In tab: ● "Sequence" on page 452 ●...
Page 455 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool The "Trigger Out" tab was introduced in firmware version 3.70. Before that, configura- tion of the output trigger signal was available via remote control only. Trigger Out Active Enables/disables the external trigger output EXT TRIG OUT for the active channel. Remote command: TRIGger:CHANnel<Ch>:AUXiliary[:ENABle] Interval...
Page 456 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Position Defines whether the trigger output pulse is generated at the start or at the end of the selected sweep interval. See Figure 5-11. Remote command: TRIGger:CHANnel<Ch>:AUXiliary:POSition 5.10.5 Sweep Control tab Allows you to control the sweep execution. The availability of certain settings depends on the selected Remote Language.
Page 457 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Remote command: INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous See also: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ALL[:STATe] Sweeps Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in "Single" sweep mode (see "Continu- ous / Single" on page 456). This setting applies to the active channel. In "Continuous" sweep mode, it is not availa- ble (grayed out).
Page 458 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool Stop Sweep Stops an ongoing sweep Remote command: INITiate<Ch>:STOP Restart Manager... Opens the Restart Manager dialog. All Channels Continuous/All Channels on Hold Selects a common sweep mode for all channels of the active recall set. ●...
Page 459 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Sweep Softtool 5.10.5.2 Restart Manager dialog The "Restart Manager" dialog defines the Restart Sweep behavior in "Single" sweep mode. Access: Channel – [Sweep] > "Sweep Control" > "Restart Manager..." Related information Refer to Section 4.1.4, "Sweep control", on page 79.
Page 460 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 5.11 Cal softtool The "Cal" softtool provides all functions related to system error calibration, scalar power calibration, and "SMARTerCal". Access: Channel – [Cal] 5.11.1 Start Cal tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNB3000 is a fully guided process.
Page 461 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 5.11.1.1 Controls on the Start Cal tab ● The "Start Auto Cal" and "Start... (Cal Unit)" buttons are only active if a calibration unit is connected to the analyzer. ● If there is more than one channel in the current recall set at the time you initiate a calibration, the Channel Selection for Calibration dialog is opened.
Page 462 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool During recalibration, a hollow green checkmark indicates that the corresponding cali- bration sweep was not yet repeated: Scalar Power Cal – Power Cal... Opens the Power Cal wizard. If the active recall set contains several channels, an "Info" box lets you decide whether the R&S ZNB3000 acquires calibration data for the active channel or for all channels.
Page 463 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 5.11.1.2 Channel Selection for Calibration dialog If you initiate a calibration and there is more than one channel in the current recall set, you are prompted to select the channels to be calibrated: ●...
Page 464 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● A successful calibration supersedes the previous calibration, discarding all previ- ous system error correction data. To keep older correction data, you can transfer them to the calibration "Pool" using Calibration Manager dialog. ●...
Page 465 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (inline calibration system) Figure 5-14: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 466 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The analyzer firmware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (suc- cessful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
Page 467 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Query further cal unit properties: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
Page 468 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool These buttons are only shown if more than 4 ports are available. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. "Next" is unavailable (and a warning is displayed) if the following happens: ● The selected characterization data do not cover all the ports to be calibrated. ●...
Page 469 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-16: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections (>4 test ports and multiple port assign- ments) If multiple port assignments are required and "Use Reduced Number of Through" on page 806 is enabled, make sure that each port assignment contains the Common Port.
Page 470 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Port Assignment (manual) The "Connections" step allows you to configure the assignments between VNA ports and calibration unit ports manually. The R&S ZNB3000 always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assign- ments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibra- tion stages.
Page 471 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-18: Direct VNA ports Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:OPTimized Start Proceeds to Step 3: Cal Unit. If the configured port assignments are invalid, this action is disabled. Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZNB3000 displays a "Cal Unit" screen that guides the user through the actual correction data acquisition.
Page 472 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool In the upper part of the "Cal Unit" screen, the R&S ZNB3000 shows the calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part visualizes the active port assignment and the measurement progress. Figure 5-19: Automatic calibration: inline calibration system If you are calibrating a matrix setup and have selected "Set to Optimized Assignment"...
Page 473 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard. If switch matrices are involved, a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S-parameter trace is shown (see Sec- tion 4.7.31.5, "Multiport...
Page 474 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Check Ports & Start Cal / Check Port Assignment Only available for matrix setups, and if you have selected "Set to Optimized Assign- ment" in the previous calibration step. "Check Port Assignment" checks whether the detected port connections coincide with the optimized assignment.
Page 475 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The wizard proceeds through the following steps: 1. "Ports": Allows you to define the system error corrections (test ports, calibration unit, characterization, calibration type). 2. "Connections": Allows you to define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB3000 and the calibration unit or units.
Page 476 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. Inactive as long as no calibration is defined. Define Calibration dialog In MultiCal mode, the "Define Calibration" dialog allows you to define multiple system error corrections: for each system error correction, select the test ports to be calibrated and the calibration unit, characterization and calibration type to be used.
Page 477 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-22: Define Calibration dialog (MultiCal, Inline Calibration System) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer firmware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (suc- cessful) calibration: ●...
Page 478 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data. If enabled, the R&S ZNB3000 firmware adjusts the factory characterization data according to the ICU temperatures.
Page 479 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-23: Multiple calibrations (and multiple port assignments) Similar functionality as for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connec- tions" on page 468): select the adequate calibration in the "Cal Type"/"Ports" table to display and edit the corresponding port assignments.
Page 480 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The wizard proceeds through the following steps: 1. "Ports and Type": Select the ports you want to calibrate and the calibration type you want to use. 2. "Connectors and Cal Kits": For all ports you want to calibrate, select the connec- tor type, gender and cal kit.
Page 481 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-24: Calibration Presetting: Ports and Type (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer firmware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (suc- cessful) calibration: ●...
Page 482 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled. Remote command: The port parameters in many calibration commands define the calibrated ports. Type/Source Selects the calibration type.
Page 483 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ● One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
Page 484 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-26: Calibration Setting: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) Connector / Port Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated. For symmetric (sexless) connector types (e.g. 7 mm / PC7), "Port Gender" is unavailable. If "Same Connector All Ports"...
Page 485 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports Assigns the same connector type or gender to all selected physical ports. For some multi-port calibration types, the port connector types must be equal, e.g. because they require a Through standard with known characteristics.
Page 486 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-27: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZNB3000 shows the sweep dia- grams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
Page 487 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool If switch matrices are involved, a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S-parameter trace is shown (see Sec- tion 4.7.31.5, "Multiport calibration", on page 271). Figure 5-28: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1""...
Page 488 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool If "Show Cal Kit Label" is enabled on the Calibration tab of the "System Config" dialog, an additional "Calibration Info" dialog is displayed. In this case, the cal sweep is started from this dialog. "Don't Show this Dialog Again"...
Page 489 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Apply Is enabled when sufficient data have been acquired for the calibrated ports and stand- ards. The button starts the calculation of the system error correction and closes the calibration wizard. The current instrument settings are stored with the correction data. To avoid incompatibilities, older calibration data is deleted unless it has been transfer- red into the calibration "Pool"...
Page 490 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Background and related information ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the "System Config" dialog. ● Refer to Section 5.11.1.5, "Calibration Setting wizard", on page 479 for further...
Page 491 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Access: Calibration Setting wizard (MultiCal) > Step 1: Ports and Type> "Add" / "Mod- ify" The layout of the dialog panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 5-29: Define Calibration dialog (manual, > 4 test ports) User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 492 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer firmware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (suc- cessful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports.
Page 493 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The upper part of the panel shows the previously configured calibrations. Select the appropriate one to get access to the related ports. For the individual calibrations, the functionality is the same as described for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits"...
Page 494 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Access: Channel – [Cal] > "Start Cal" > "Power Cal..." Screen elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification").
Page 495 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool After a successful power calibration, the trace "a<m>(P<m>)" must be close to the "Cal Power". During a measurement receiver calibration ("Meas. Receiver"), the following traces are displayed: ● The trace "a<m>(P<m>)" shows the (previously calibrated) power at the calibrated reference plane (source port P<m>).
Page 496 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Apply Is enabled when a new set of power calibration data has been acquired. The button applies all available power calibrations to the active channel, aborts the verification sweeps, and closes the port overview section. The power calibration state is indicated in the trace list, see Section 4.5.6.4, "Power calibration...
Page 497 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Open the Power Cal Settings tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] Calibrate Only Port Frequency Frequency conversion measurements, by default the reference receivers are cali- brated for all resulting frequencies – even if they are currently not relevant for some ports.
Page 498 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● If the source port and the calibrated port are different, the measurement receiver is calibrated by the wave generated at the source port. Connect the source port to the calibrated port, including any external devices that you used for the source power calibration.
Page 499 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 185. Use the Power Cal Settings tab"Pwr Cal Settings"...
Page 500 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● When you apply the acquired "SMARTerCal", the active calibration is replaced and discarded. To persist any kind of calibration, you can transfer it to the calibration "Pool" using Calibration Manager dialog. ● The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure is stored in the analyzer.
Page 501 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-31: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (Inline Calibration System) User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 502 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-32: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (> 4 Ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
Page 503 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool For background information, see Section 4.5.5, "Automatic calibration", on page 171. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:ALL? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess Characterization "Characterization" on page 466. Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
Page 504 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. Next is unavailable (and a warning is displayed) if the following happens: ● Fewer than two ports have been selected. ● The selected characterization data do not cover all the ports to be calibrated. ●...
Page 505 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Related information Refer to Section 4.5.5.6, "Multiple port assignments", on page 181 for details on multi- ple port assignments. Optimized port assignment If there is a switch matrix on the signal path, you can select between default and opti- mized port assignment (see "Optimized port assignment"...
Page 506 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool If auto-detection fails because of a high attenuation in the signal path, you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select "Default Port Assignment". Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Set to Default Port Assignment Restores the default port assignments.
Page 507 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Step 3: SMARTerCal In the final step, the R&S ZNB3000 displays a "SMARTerCal" screen that guides the user through the calibration data acquisition. 1. For each port assignment: a) Connect the calibration unit to the related set of test ports. b) Perform an automatic system error correction.
Page 508 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 2. Finally: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 509 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Use "Next"/"Prev" to navigate between the calibration substeps. If you are calibrating a matrix setup and have selected "Set to Optimized Assignment" in the previous calibration step, the detection functionality slightly changes. Because a different cabling can invalidate the optimization logic, it is not possible to adjust the assignment to the auto-detected one.
Page 510 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer Detect Ports & Start Cal Performs the "Detect Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNB3000 (with a little help from the attached cali- bration unit) auto-detects the connected ports.
Page 511 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Use the Power Cal wizard to perform an additional source flatness calibration (see Section 4.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with scalar power calibration", on page 190). Note: Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate.
Page 512 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Background and related information ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the "System Config" dialog. ● Use the Power Cal wizard to perform an additional source flatness calibration (see Section 4.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with scalar power...
Page 513 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. Inactive as long as no SMARTerCal is defined. Define Calibration Dialog In MultiCal mode, the "Define Calibration" dialog allows you to define the individual SMARTerCals: select the test ports to be calibrated, the calibration type, the calibration unit and characterization, the power meter and power port.
Page 514 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-38: Define Calibration dialog (MultiCal, Inline Calibration System) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
Page 515 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Characterization "Characterization" on page 466. Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
Page 516 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-39: Multiple port assignments Similar functionality as for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connec- tions" on page 504): select the adequate calibration in the "Cal Type"/"Ports" table to display and edit the corresponding port assignments.
Page 517 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool a) Acquire error correction data for the required ports and port pairs, and the required standards. b) Acquire source power calibration data at the "Power Port". c) Finally, decide whether to apply the resulting calibration. Background and related information ●...
Page 518 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-40: SMARTerCal (Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 5-41: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type (>4 ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated.
Page 519 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The analyzer firmware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (suc- cessful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
Page 520 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Background information Refer to Section 4.5.2, "Calibration standards and calibration kits", on page 164. Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed, if one of the following hap- pens: ●...
Page 521 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-43: SMARTerCal (Manual), Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) The upper part of the panel shows the selected ports and the calibration type. The lower part gives access to the connector and cal kit settings. Connector / Port Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated.
Page 522 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi- cal ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZNB3000 automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type. Use "Import Cal Kit..."...
Page 523 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The upper part of the calibration screen presents ● calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter during stand- ards measurement, ● power trace diagrams during the power calibration sweep The lower part displays the calibrated port (pairs) with their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress.
Page 524 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-44: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
Page 525 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] See also: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:LOAD:SELected Restart Sweep on Std. Meas. If this function is active, a new standard measurement initiates a new sweep, starting at the beginning ("Start") of the sweep range: The sweep points for the calibration sweep are in ascending order, like for an ordinary measurement.
Page 526 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 5.11.1.11 SMARTerCal wizard (manual, MultiCal) The multiple calibration version of the SMARTerCal wizard (manual) guides you through the setup and simultaneous manual acquisition of multiple SMARTerCals. Except for the possibility to create multiple calibrations, the layout and functionality is the same as for the single calibration version of the wizard.
Page 527 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Modify Edits the selected SMARTerCal: opens the Define Calibration dialog with the corre- sponding ports and calibration type pre-selected. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits. Inactive as long as no calibration is defined. Define Calibration dialog Selects the calibrated analyzer ports, the calibration type and specifies the power meter connection.
Page 528 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-46: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal, >4 ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
Page 529 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Power Meter Shows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured and are available for the scalar source power calibration of a single source port. The last configured power meter is selected by default. See "Configured Devices"...
Page 530 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● The order of the system error correction and power calibration sweeps is arbitrary, but make sure that you always connect the proper equipment. The possibility to "share" measurements between the calibrations and the "Reduced Through"...
Page 531 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: on page 908 CALCulate:CALValidate:MODE Advanced mode In advanced mode you can configure the validation settings and run or rerun particular measurements (Measurement, "Calibration Standard" on page 531 ). Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit).
Page 532 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● "Mag (Lin)/Phase": lower and upper limits for magnitude (linear) and phase; defaults are ±52 mU for magnitude and ±8° for phase deviations. Note that phase limits are only checked for the high reflection standards Open and Short, and not for Match.
Page 533 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The buttons in the "Cal Devices" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Cal Connector Types...": See Section 5.11.2.1, "Cal Connector Types dialog", on page 533 ● "Cal Kits...": See Section 5.11.2.2, "Calibration Kits dialog", on page 535 ●...
Page 534 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Storing connector type settings Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and available for all recall sets. The connector type settings are always stored together with the associated calibration kit parameters. The Calibration Kits dia- provides buttons to export and import cal kit and connector settings.
Page 535 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● For waveguides, the low frequency cutoff frequency f is important because no wave propagation is possible at frequencies below f . If a standard is measured to acquire calibration data, the analyzer checks the low frequency cutoff. If the start frequency of the sweep range is below f , an error message is generated.
Page 536 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Cal kit labels Assigning a "Label" to user-defined calibration kits is optional. However, the label is displayed in many dialogs and can provide useful information about the kit, e.g. its serial number. It is even possible to assign several calibration kits with the same name, distinguished by their label, to a common connector type.
Page 537 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<ConnType>:SELect [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<ConnType>:LSELect Add / Copy / Delete / Standards... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage calibration kits: ● "Add" creates a cal kit file for the selected connector type. ●...
Page 538 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool One port and two port standards are listed in two separate tables. Most of the buttons on the right side are available only if the "Kit Standards" dialog was opened for a user- defined calibration kit.
Page 539 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Add / Copy... / Delete / View / Modify... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage standards: ● "Add" adds a new standard to the calibration kit. The properties of the standard can be edited in the table.
Page 540 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The diagram in the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog depends on the standard type for which the dialog was opened. Moreover, it is possible to modify the circuit model using the buttons in the upper right of the dialog. Offset Parameters The entries in the upper part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards"...
Page 541 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool – "Short" for 0 Ω – "Match" for the reference impedance of the current connector type – any resistance "R" ● The fringing capacitance C and the residual inductance L are both assumed to be frequency-dependent and approximated by the first four terms of the Taylor series around f = 0 Hz.
Page 542 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNB3000 auto-detects all calibra- tion units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connec- ted, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
Page 543 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Characterization Data Displays all characterizations which are stored on the active cal unit. The "Factory" characterization is available for all calibration units; it ensures an accurate calibration for all standard applications. Characterizations stored on an SD card (inserted at the cal unit) are prefixed with "SD:".
Page 544 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Figure 5-48: Characterization of standard calibration units Figure 5-49: Characterization of inline calibration units Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.
Page 545 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Take OSM / Take All OSM and Through "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZNB3000 acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data.
Page 546 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT 5.11.3 Power Cal Settings tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration is a fully menu-guided process. Efficient power calibration procedure ●...
Page 547 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Switch Off Other Sources Ensures that the power at all sources except the calibrated source is switched off dur- ing the calibration. Recommended, if the measurement involves a combination of dif- ferent signals. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:OSOurces[:STATe] Flatness Cal –...
Page 548 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool "Ref. Receiver after" is the default behavior. Remote command: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:COLLect:METHod Power Meter Shows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured and are available for the power calibration of a source port. The last configured power meter is selected by default.
Page 549 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer. The diagram visualizes the calibration setup. Port Cal Power Select a source port to define its port-specific power levels for source power calibra- tions.
Page 550 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Cal Power Offset ← Port Cal Power For power calibrations only: Specifies a gain (positive values) or an attenuation (nega- tive values) in the signal path between the source port and the calibrated reference plane.
Page 551 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The firmware models the following deviations: ● A two-port connected to the DUT which is not present during power calibration (e.g. an on-wafer probe) ● A two-port connected to the power meter during the power calibration (e.g. an adapter) The "Power Meter Transmission Coefficients"...
Page 552 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Frequency / Transm. Coefficients: Insert, Delete, Delete All The required two-port information is a list of transmission coefficients at different fre- quency values (power loss list). The buttons in the dialog provide different ways of cre- ating and modifying the list.
Page 553 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Recall... / Save... You can save the displayed power loss list to a power meter correction list file with extension (*.pmcl) and reload it in later sessions. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch> MMEMory:STORe:CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch> 5.11.4 Use Cal tab Provides access to functions for activating, deactivating and managing calibrations.
Page 554 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection[:STATe] Load Match Correction Load match correction prevents a possible impairment of the transmission S-parameter measurements due to the influence of the waves reflected at the receive (load) ports. It is performed as follows: ●...
Page 555 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Manage Cals – Cal Manager... Opens the Calibration Manager dialog Manage Cals – Remove all Cal Data This button cleans the active channel's existing calibration data and also removes links to the calibration pool. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DELete Manage Cals –...
Page 556 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool 5.11.4.3 Calibration Manager dialog The "Calibration Manager" dialog stores user correction data to the cal pool and assigns stored correction data to channels. Section 4.5.3, "Calibration pool", on page 170 for background information. Access: Channel –...
Page 557 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...
Page 558 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Sfk>:PORT<PhyPt>? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter:COUNt? [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:SSTate? 5.11.4.4 JoinCal dialog Allows you to join existing calibrations. Access: Channel – [Cal] > "Use Cal" > "JoinCal" Background information Section 4.5.10, "Joining calibrations", on page 192. Input Calibration1/Input Calibration2/Cal Name Select the input calibrations to be joined, and specify a name for the resulting calibra- tion Remote command:...
Page 559 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool ● external switch matrices are used, measurement uncertainty analysis is not sup- ported. ● METAS calibration and verification is not fully supported via remote control. Some actions must be performed from the VNA GUI. 5.11.5.1 Controls on the METAS Cal tab (option K50) METAS Cal Active...
Page 560 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool If no measurement data are available, the firmware displays a message box instead of the "Measurement Filename" dialog: Export Data to METAS VNA Tools Saves the current state of the METAS VNA Tools project that is created with the METAS calibration.
Page 561 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Default is 2 (95% confidence interval). Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:METas:UNCertainty 5.11.5.2 METAS Calibration (Manual) dialog This dialog allows you to set up and perform a METAS Calibration of the active chan- nel. Access: Channel – [Cal] > "METAS Cal" > METAS Calibration – "Start (Manual)" Only a single VNA channel can be METAS calibrated at a time.
Page 562 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Type Selects the calibration type. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine <CalName>, MTOSm | MUOSm | MOSM | MTRL, ... Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Connector/Port Gender Specifies the connector and gender of the ports selected in Step 1: Ports and Type.
Page 563 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool The "Uncertainty" control indicates whether the selected characterization actually com- prises uncertainties. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect Same Connector all Ports/Same Gender all Ports "Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports" on page 485. Import Cal Kit...
Page 564 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Start Proceeds to Step 3: Calibration. If the configuration is not plausible, a warning is dis- played: Step 3: Calibration In step 3, the calibration is performed. The procedure is the same as for regular cali- brations of the selected type (see "Step 3: Calibration"...
Page 565 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Verification Kit Allows you to specify the verification kits to be used for the related ports. Verification standards are characterized individually, including uncertainties. So initially no verification kits are defined. Use Import Verification Kit... to import your verification kit.
Page 566 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool A "Verification Kit with Uncertainties" is a ZIP file containing verification standard char- acterizations in a format supported by METAS VNA Tools (sdatb, sdatx, sdatcv). See the document "Data Formats" on the METAS VNA Tools internet page (https:// www.metas.ch/metas/en/home/fabe/hochfrequenz/vna-tools.html, section "VNA Tools"...
Page 567 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Cal softtool Collapse In collapsed state, the "METAS Verification" dock widget presents a condensed view, focusing on the verification results for the available verification standards. Save Verification Data Same as Export Data to METAS VNA Tools.
Page 568 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Add New Connection/Add Cable Movement While a METAS calibration is active, these buttons notify the METAS VNA Tools about additional connector reconnections and/or cable movements. The latter is only applica- ble if cables were configured during the setup of the METAS calibration. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:METas:CABLe:REConnection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:METas:CABLe:MOVement...
Page 569 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.1 Controls on the Channels tab The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Section 5.12.1.2, "Channel Manager dialog", on page 571 ● "RFFE...": see Section 5.12.1.3, "RFFE Config dialog for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 03", on page 572 Active Channel...
Page 570 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one. The name can be changed in the "Channel Manager" dialog. Tips: ● To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in a new diagram area, use New Channel + Diagram.
Page 571 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Channel On Toggles the measurement state of the active channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] Only Active Channel On If enabled, only the active channel is measured; all other channels are switched off temporarily and dynamically. Temporarily means: If "Only Active Channel On"...
Page 572 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table represent the existing channels (rows) together with certain editable (white) or non-editable (gray) properties (columns). ● "Name" indicates the name of the related channel. ●...
Page 573 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool If the instrument is equipped with variant 02 of the extension board, a slightly different user interface is shown. The "Measurement" columns are hidden and the remaining content of the RFFE and GPIO tab are presented on a single "Control" tab. Background information Refer to Section 4.7.22, "RFFE GPIO...
Page 574 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The "Set" button activates the "Output Voltage" and "Range" ("Shunt" resistance) set- tings. The "Meas" button starts the voltage and current measurements. Sweep Sequencer tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Section 5.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 581.
Page 575 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ● The right part allows you to define and execute voltage and current measurements on the GPIO pins (see "GPIO voltage and current measurements" on page 579) The "Apply" button activates both the "Output Voltage" and "Range" ("Shunt" resist- ance) settings.
Page 576 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings[:STATe] CLK, VIO, VLow, VHigh These columns give access to the physical properties of the RFFE interfaces: clock rate ("CLK"), supply voltage ("VIO") and the voltage levels of the data signal SDATA ("VLow") and clock signal SCLK ("VHigh").
Page 577 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool For details and background information, see the "MIPI Alliance Specification for RF Front-End Control Interface". Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA SEND Use the "SEND" button to send the previously defined command, e.g. before starting the sweep for the related channel.
Page 578 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Range / Shunt Defines the current range for the voltage and current measurement on the respective RFFE pin. The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance. Output Voltage and "Range" / "Shunt" settings do not take effect until pressed.
Page 579 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Figure 5-51: Basic GPIO Configuration for HW Var. 03 Seq. Enables/disables the corresponding GPIO pin in the Sweep Sequencer (see Sec- tion 5.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 581). Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var.
Page 580 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
Page 581 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Note that "Start Meas" does not automatically activate the "Voltage" and "Range" / "Shunt" settings of the current channel. Use Apply to activate them manually. The measurement (=sampling) time can only be set via remote command. It is not channel-specific and applies to RFFE and GPIO measurements.
Page 582 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 2. Use the "Add" or "Insert" button to add a new step to the command/switch sequence - either at the end of the existing sequence or above the selected step, respectively. 3. Make the appropriate settings in the sweep sequencer table: a) Define the RFFE commands ("RFFE"...
Page 583 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Wait (Sweep Sequencer Table) The cells in the "Wait" column define the delay times between subsequent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep (segment) start. Remote command: Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<SeqNr>:DELay Segmented sweeps: CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<SegNr>:SEQuence<SeqNr>:DELay...
Page 584 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ted channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 571), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out). Multiple DUTs... Opens a dialog that allows you to set up the analyzer for parallel measurements on multiple DUTs.
Page 585 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool appears in the channel line. "Reset" plus "Apply" or "OK" deactivates the arbitrary mode. Channel base frequency After a Reset, all port frequencies are set to the channel base frequency f . For fre- quency sweeps, f corresponds to the unmodified sweep range.
Page 586 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ● For the R&S ZNB3000, among the analyzer ports driven by the same internal source, only one can operate as generator port. An external generator always represents a permanent signal source that is switched on for all partial measurements.
Page 587 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Current Formula Apart from the current Frequency Conversion Formula, the analyzer firmware main- tains a list of named, user-defined formulas. ● "Add Formula to List..." adds the current frequency conversion formula to this list. ●...
Page 588 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ● For mixer measurements, select a "Base Ratio" of 1, a "Frequency Offset" equal to the LO frequency, and an "Offset Ratio" of ±1. If the RF signal is at the channel base frequency, the port frequency is at the frequency of the upper (lower) side- band.
Page 589 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Power Conversion Opens a dialog that allows you to define a port-specific source power range (for power sweeps) or fixed power (for frequency, time and CW mode sweeps) for the current channel. See "Cal Power Config dialog"...
Page 590 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool ● "Cal Power Offset" on page 550 Receiver Level tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings. Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware (see Section 4.7.26, "Receiver step attenuators", on page 258). Attenuation Sets the attenuation at the respective measurement receiver (b-wave).
Page 591 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Apply / OK / Cancel Modified "Port Settings" take effect on "Apply" or "OK". Use "Cancel" to discard possi- ble changes. If R&S ZNB3-K4 is available, then depending on the current port configuration, "Apply" and "OK"...
Page 592 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Figure 5-53: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
Page 593 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to configure these DUTs and to declare the connections between physical VNA ports and DUT ports. Furthermore it provides convenient access to port-related settings. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Port Config" > "Multiple DUTs..." Related information Section 4.1.4.3, "Parallel measurements on multiple DUTs",...
Page 594 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool DUT Definition tab Modify an existing DUT The DUT table allows you to rename an existing DUT. 1. Locate the related row in the DUT table. 2. In the "DUT" column, specify the DUT's name. Controls and Functions The GUI functions are self-explanatory;...
Page 595 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool To change the reference impedance for a particular DUT port, proceed as follows: 1. Select the related row in the DUT table (lower left part of the dialog). The DUT perspective (upper left part of the dialog) now displays the selected DUT. 2.
Page 596 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:STATe Minimum Offset The "Minimum Offset" can be specified either as an absolute value ("Direct Value") or as a multiple of the measurement bandwidth ("Bandwidth Factor"). Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:MODE SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:DVALue SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:BWFactor State indication warning When attempting to activate the "Parallel Measurement with Frequency Offset"...
Page 597 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.3.1 Controls on the Mode tab Figure 5-55: Mode tab for R&S ZNB3004 (left) and R&S ZNB3020 For the R&S ZNB3004, the controls on the "Mode" tab are organized in sections "Driv- ing Mode", "Image Suppr."...
Page 598 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool eliminate known spurious components in the input signal that can distort the measure- ment, especially in the low frequency range. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer auto-selects the LO frequency, depending on the receiver (RF) frequency and the test port.
Page 599 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO <...
Page 600 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Manual Config... The "Manual Config..." button opens the AGC Manual Configuration dialog that allows to configure the GC for the individual sweep segments, drive ports and receivers. This button is enabled in "Manual" AGC Mode only.
Page 601 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Range Segmented AGC is enabled, each sweep segment can be configured separately. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL Drive-port specific settings "Drive Port", "a", "b<j>": Selects the AGC mode for the respective drive port, a and b wave and receivers.
Page 602 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.3.3 Enhanced dynamic range for R&S ZNB3020 In enhanced dynamic range (EDR) mode, the firmware calculates the corrected received wave by cross-fading the waves measured at two different receive paths: a low distortion and a low noise path. The EDR mode can be enabled or disabled per channel.
Page 603 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.1 Controls on the Intermodulation tab external switch matrices are used, intermodulation measurements are not supported. Hence, except for the "Generators..." button the controls on this tab are disabled. The buttons on the "Intermodulation" tab open the following dialogs: ●...
Page 604 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool CW Mode Spectrum In CW spectrum mode, the intermodulation measurement is performed at fixed fre- quency of the lower tone ("CW Frequency") and the upper tone ("CW Frequency" + "Tone Distance"). The analyzer displays intermodulation products up to a selectable order ("IM Order") around the lower and upper tone frequencies.
Page 605 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency[:CW] [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:SPECtrum:MORDer [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:SPECtrum[:STATe] 5.12.4.2 Intermodulation Presetting wizard The "Intermodulation Presetting" wizard guides the user through the setup of an inter- modulation measurement. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Intermodulation" > "Intermod Wizard" The wizard proceeds in 4 steps: 1.
Page 606 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 3. Select the measurement results. Refer to Section 5.2.4, "Intermod tab", on page 301. 4. Finish the wizard with or without power calibration. Refer to Section 5.12.4.5, "Intermod. Pwr. Cal wizard", on page 611. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 607 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.3 Define Intermodulation Distortion Measurement dialog The dialog configures the intermodulation measurement (except for power and fre- quency settings). The "OK" button is available when a valid configuration has been defined. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Intermodulation" > "Define Intermod" Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R&S ZNB3000 with two internal sources (see Section 4.7.17, "Second internal...
Page 608 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Lower Tone Selects an analyzer port as a source of the lower tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:LTONe Upper Tone Selects an analyzer port or external generator as a source of the upper tone signal. The source must be different from the lower tone source, i.e.
Page 609 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Selecting a different source is necessary, if the bandwidth of the "Combiner Out" signal does not fully cover the required receiver frequency range. For example, if a filter is used at the combiner output to cut off the intermodulation products originating from the combiner.
Page 610 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect 5.12.4.4 Frequencies and Power dialog The "Frequencies and Power" dialog defines the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. The frequency of the upper tone is equal to the lower tone fre- quency plus the "Tone Distance"...
Page 611 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.5 Intermod. Pwr. Cal wizard The "Intermod. Pwr. Cal" wizard guides you through the power calibration for the inter- modulation measurement. A power calibration ensures: ● accurate levels at the input of the DUT (source power calibration for the lower and upper tone) ●...
Page 612 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool If a frequency conversion measurement is active, a second source power calibra- tion is performed at the converted lower tone frequency (receiver frequency). This second source power calibration is the basis for the receiver calibration in step 3. ●...
Page 613 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The progress of the calibration is monitored in the calibration sweep diagram, in close analogy to an ordinary power sweep; see "Calibration Sweep Diagram" on page 494. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:LTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:UTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:IMODulation:ACQuire Apply After all calibration steps have finished successfully, "Apply"...
Page 614 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Two dedicated "SMARTerCal" wizards facilitate the channel calibration. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.7.4.2, "Scalar mixer measurements", on page 229 ● "Two-stage mixer measurements" on page 230 5.12.6.1 Controls on the Mixer Mode tab Most of the "Mixer Mode"...
Page 615 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 5.12.6.2 Mixer Presetting wizard The "Mixer Presetting" wizard guides you through the setup of a mixer measurement. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Mixer Mode" > "Mixer Meas Wizard..." The setup of the mixer measurement proceeds in 4 steps: 1.
Page 616 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name LO[m] Leakage S<i><k> Ch_LO LO_Leak LO[m] Feedthrough Ch_LO LO_Thru S<j><k> <i> = RF test port number, <j> = IF test port number,<k> = LO test port number [m] = Mixer number (only if 2 mixers are measured) measured w/o frequency conversion Note that LO parameters can only be measured if a VNA port was selected as the...
Page 617 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool tion 5.12.6.4, "SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) wizard for mixer mode", on page 621 and Section 5.12.6.5, "SMARTerCal (Manual) wizard for mixer mode", on page 623). 5.12.6.3 (Mixer) Setup dialog The "(Mixer) Setup" dialog is an example of a Multi-channel setup dialog.
Page 618 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Port selection The port selection lists in the upper part of the dialog contain all analyzer ports or external generators which can provide the RF signal and local oscillator (LO) signals. The fractional numbers in the rectangles indicate the frequency conversion settings from the "Frequency"...
Page 619 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool The table in the "Power" tab contains the following columns: ● "Port" contains the RF and IF ports and one or two LO ports, depending on whether the "2nd Mixer" is selected. ●...
Page 620 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Each conversion factor is a ratio of two integer numbers. The frequency-converting device is considered to be part of the mixer system under test (MUT). In the default configuration, where the RF signal is swept and the LO signals are at fixed frequency, the conversion factors do not modify the analyzer's source signals (RF, LO 1, LO 2).
Page 621 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Activates the scalar mixer mode and closes the dialog. A "Mix" label in the channel list indicates that a mixer measurement is active. Reset Freq Conv disables the mixer measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 5.12.6.4 SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) wizard for mixer mode...
Page 622 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool If the R&S ZNB3000 is used as LO and only a 2-port Cal Unit is available, Multiple port assignments are required. 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 5-56: System Error Correction User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 623 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool Figure 5-57: Scalar Power Calibration 5.12.6.5 SMARTerCal (Manual) wizard for mixer mode Allows to perfom a variant of a manual "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" – "Start... (Man- ual)"...
Page 624 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Channel Config softtool 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 5-58: System Error Correction Figure 5-59: Scalar Power Calibration User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 625 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool 5.13 Offset Embed softtool The "Offset Embed" softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port. The offset compensates for the known length and loss of (non-dispersive and per- fectly matched) transmission lines between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT.
Page 626 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-60: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function. A green LED on a but- ton indicates that the corresponding deembedding/embedding function is active. If the "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 627 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Active The control in the "Active" column enables or disables the configured length and loss parameters for the respective Port (i.e. adds/removes them to/from the calculation flow) without changing the parameter values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd...
Page 628 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool All Offsets On / All Offsets Off Enables or disables the length and loss compensation for all ports. Use the controls in the Active column to activate/deactivate the length and loss com- pensation for selected ports.
Page 629 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended tab). This network is defined by its S-parame- ters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p).
Page 630 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Use the controls on the right-hand side of the dialog to define the port set and the order of the ports within the port set. Note however that the speed of the de-/embedding calculation depends on the port order.
Page 631 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId> 5.13.1.6 Balanced panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate deembedding/embedding of balanced...
Page 632 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[: STATe] File Name <i>/Inc. Seq. <i>/Swap Gates <i> The ellipsis button in the "File Name <i>" column is enabled as long as the selected Balanced tab comprises a two-port or four-port data network (*.s2p or *.s4p file). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 633 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands. multiple port groups (DUTs) are configured and Ground Loop per Port Group enabled, the panel displays the available port groups.
Page 634 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 5.13.1.9 Differential Match panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding.
Page 635 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled if a 2-port data Network selected. When loading the touchstone file (*.s2p), the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 636 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-63: Fixture modeling dock widget: balanced (ISD/SFD/EZD) For ISD, SFD and EZD, the fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see "Measure Coupon"...
Page 637 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool If you activate "Timestamp Filenames", the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:REName Use Impedance Correction Enables/disables the impedance correction functionality of the respective tool.
Page 638 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> Cancel Closes the dialog without applying any deembedding files. Measure Coupon The "Measure Coupon" section allows you to measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture. Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured.
Page 639 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure Load File Allows you to load the coupon properties from a Touchstone file (*.s*p”). Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Active Before measuring the test coupon, use these controls to indicate the physical ports to which it is connected.
Page 640 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Load File Load DUT + test fixture data from file Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + test fixture at the Active ports. The display area shows all the S-parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embed- ding.
Page 641 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool This button is only active if: ● The test coupon measurement finished successfully or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file (see "Measure Coupon" on page 638) ● The measurement of DUT + test fixture finished successfully (see "Measure DUT + Test Fixture"...
Page 642 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-65: Fixture modeling dock widget: Delta Cal Delta Cal requires a valid calibration of the active channel. The fixture modeling then proceeds in the following steps: Start Delta Cal Apply 3. Perform a source flatness calibration (optional) Start Delta Cal Enabled if the active channel is calibrated and has single-ended ports only.
Page 643 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Calculations Some additional parameters that define how the ISD tool calculates its output. Enforce Passitivity ← Calculations If enabled (default), the ISD tool enforces passivity and reciprocity for the test coupons and the test fixture. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PASSivity Trace Coupling ←...
Page 644 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:SCALe:FREQuency DC Extrapolation ← Calculations This setting is only active if ISD version 2019.12.18 or later is used. If disabled (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep.
Page 645 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Scaling for flight time ← Lead Ins Overrides the lead-in’s flight time (i.e. its delay) in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long. Default is 1. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:SCALe:FTIMe Auto.
Page 646 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool ● "Ports on right": Skip the ports on the right (according to the selected port sequence) ● "Manually set ports": use Ports to Skip (manual) to define the ports to be skipped Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PORT:SKIP:LEFT...
Page 647 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture ● "Ports 1&3 on Left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
Page 648 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Port Order Tells the EZD tool about the port ordering of the test coupon ● "Odd on left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
Page 649 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Impedance Calculation This setting controls the EZD impedance extraction for the transmission line compo- nents of the coupon measurements. (EZD 2.0 and higher) Fitted RLGC This technique uses a least squares fit of the attenuation vs. fre- quency relationship to establish a nominal attenuation curve for com- puting loss over distance for the deembedding.
Page 650 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:HFC CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit High Frequency Truncation/Max. Frequency High frequency truncation sets the highest frequency value to retain in the deembed- ding results. After deembedding is performed, which always uses the entire measure- ment data set, those S-parameters above the Max Valid Frequency will be removed from the result file.
Page 651 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Generate Side 1/Generate Side2 If enabled (default), the tool generates the deembedding file for side 1 / side 2. Impedance Correction Settings Provides additional settings for the impedance correction of the Delta Cal tool. Reset to Default Resets the settings of the "Delta Cal Advanced Settings"...
Page 652 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Table 5-6: DUT types DUT type Description ISD only ⃞ "1 x 1 Single Ended" 1 single-ended input, 1 single-ended output ⃞ "1 x Single Ended" 1 single-ended input, no output ⃞ "1 x 1 Balanced"...
Page 653 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool "Single Ended" This coupon model is appropriate for one or more single-ended inputs (outputs), where: ● All inputs (outputs) use the same coupon model and ● There is no interaction between inputs (outputs) if more than one is present on the DUT Figure 5-66: n single-ended input ports (uncoupled) "Balanced"...
Page 654 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool "Coupled" This coupon type is available for DUTs with two or more single-ended or balanced inputs (outputs). It is suitable for a multiport DUT with coupled inputs (outputs) that have to be deembedded as a single unit.
Page 655 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool ● "SFD Advanced Settings" on page 646 ● "EZD Advanced Settings" on page 647 Page 2: Measure / Load and Apply The second page of the "Deembedding Assistant" dock widget allows you to: ●...
Page 656 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Depending on the selected DUT, a different set of test coupon types is supported. Test coupon "Sym 2x Thru" "1x Open" "1x Short" "1x Open, 1x Short" ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑...
Page 657 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool – For single-ended coupons, any physical port can be selected, even if that port is part of a logical balanced port or port set. – For balanced coupons, you can only select a preciously defined logical port. ●...
Page 658 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool ● A range of single-ended or balanced ports for the nx DUT sides If you want to apply impedance correction, select "Impedance Correction" and "Mea- sure" the DUT. Once the coupons (and the DUT) are measured, the "Apply" button becomes active. Use it to run the tool and, if successful, perform the deembedding on the selected ports.
Page 659 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Port Order Tells the Delta Cal tool about the port ordering of the fixture ● "Odd on left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
Page 660 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Background information Refer to the following sections. ● Section 4.6, "Offset parameters and de-/embedding", on page 193 ● Section 4.6.1.1, "Definition of offset parameters", on page 193 ● Section 4.6.1.3, "Auto Length", on page 194 ●...
Page 661 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool and overwrite each other. See also Section 4.6.1.1, "Definition of offset parameters", on page 193. Note: The entered parameters must correspond the actual (one-way) length of the transmission line. To account for the propagation in both directions, the phase shift of a reflection parameter due to a given length offset is twice the phase shift of a transmis- sion parameter.
Page 662 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Example: The impedance of an antenna with possible faults is measured using a time gate and a variable length offset. If "Adjust Time Gate" is off, the time gate is at a con- stant distance from the offset-corrected reference plane (end of the offset transmission line).
Page 663 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Fixture Compensation... The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation dialog. Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 5.13.2.2 Fixture Compensation dialog This dialog allows you to correct the measurement result for the effects of a test fixture.
Page 664 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] Direct Compensation With "Direct Compensation", a frequency-dependent transmission factor is calculated; "Auto Length and Loss vs. Direct Compensation" on page 197. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:DFComp[:STATe]? Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNB3000 performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short;...
Page 665 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool For "Direct Compensation", it is also possible to save the acquired data to file. In future measurements, you can load these files instead of repeating the data acquisition. Figure 5-74: Measure Fixture dialog: Direct Compensation (and Prompt for Each Port) "Direct Compensation"...
Page 666 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Background information Refer to the following sections. ● Section 4.6, "Offset parameters and de-/embedding", on page 193 ● Section 4.6.1.2, "Definition of loss parameters", on page 193 ● Section 4.6.1.4, "Auto Length and Loss", on page 195 ●...
Page 667 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool ● To calculate the electrical length offset and loss of port i, you have to select a trace that uses port i as one of its receive ports. It is not relevant for the "Auto Length and Loss"...
Page 668 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-75: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool tab left = 2-port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 669 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) configured for the active channel. This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding". Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:ACTivateall[:STATe] Network The graphical list contains all available 2-port networks: ●...
Page 670 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool In case the port number conventions of the loaded two-port Touchstone file differ from network analyzer conventions (port 1 on the left, i.e. on the analyzer side; port 2 on the right, i.e. on the DUT side), it is possible to "Swap Gates". The analyzer then inter- changes the port numbers (e.g.
Page 671 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 571), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 660.
Page 672 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding". Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:ACTivateall[:STATe] Network Depending on the size m of the selected port set, the graphical list contains all availa- ble 2m-port deembedding/embedding networks. Note: For port pairs (m=2) the deembedding/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element models (in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file (see...
Page 673 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 674 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-76: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool tab left = 4-port data file selected for deembedding right = other network selected for embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 675 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Remote command: The <LogPt> numeric suffix in the embedding/deembedding commands identifies the logical port; see e.g. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe]. All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) configured for the active channel. This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding".
Page 676 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> D1, D2 The "D1" and "D2" buttons are enabled as long as the selected Network comprises subnetworks that are defined via two-port or four-port Touchstone files (*.s2p, *.s4p). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 677 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool 5.13.7 Ground Loop tab Allows you to specify a 1-port ground loop de-/embedding network. Such a network is either defined: ● Via its S-parameter stored in a one-port Touchstone file (*.s1p) or ●...
Page 678 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding". Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:ACTivateall[:STATe] Network The graphical list contains all available 1-port networks: symbol selects "no network" and disables ground loop de-/embedding. The "1-Port Data" network is defined by imported S-parameter data; see Select File..
Page 679 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Set to Ideal Ground This function is enabled as long as the 1-Port data network is active. An imported S- parameter set is replaced by the S-parameters of an ideal through connection, which eliminates the transformation network.
Page 680 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 571), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview This button is available on all de-/embedding-related tabs of the "Offset Embed" soft- tool.
Page 681 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by imported S-parameter data; see Select File... ● The "Shunt L, Shunt C" network is defined by lumped elements whose parameters are displayed below the graphical list. Tip: Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol.
Page 682 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:EDELay:VNETwork Offset > Wave De-/Embed. If enabled, the firmware uses the new, wave-based de-/embedding calculation (default). Otherwise, the legacy S parameter-based calculation is used. See Sec- tion 4.1.5, "Data flow",...
Page 683 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool 5.13.10.1 Controls on the Deembed Assistant tab Overview This button is available on all de-/embedding-related tabs of the "Offset Embed" soft- tool. It opens the Overview panel in the Offset Embed dock widget.
Page 684 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Output Directory... Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the directory where the fixture modeling tools store their data. Default is C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault:CLEar Deembedding Files... This button is only enabled if the coupon data provided to the deembedding tool was at least partly loaded from file.
Page 685 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool The dialog contrasts actual and recommended settings, and highlights the values we recommend adjusting. The values in the "Current" column can be edited; if you modify one of them, the recommended values are updated according to the new value. The "Current"...
Page 686 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Page 1: Topology The first page of the "Deembedding Assistant" defines the deembedding topology. It allows you to describe your device under test (DUT) in terms of inputs, outputs, and the test coupons required to model the DUT's fixture. Depending on the selected fixture tool, it narrows down the selectable...
Page 687 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool The dock widget presents a graphical representation of the selected "DUT" and cou- models, e.g. for a "1 x 1 Balanced" DUT witch "Balanced" left and right models: Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:TYPE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:PRESet Left: Model A / Right: Model A|B Allows you to select a coupon type, i.e.
Page 688 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool "Uncoupled" This coupon type selection is available only for balanced ports on the DUT. It is used for deembedding a balanced port when it is desired to treat the single-ended legs of the port as uncoupled entities. Figure 5-79: n uncoupled balanced input ports "Coupled"...
Page 689 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Overview This button takes you to the Overview panel of the "Offset Embed" dock widget, which allows you to interact with the individual components of the deembedding calculation chain. To reopen the "Deembedding Assistant" panel, you have to click/tap on the "Deembed Assistant"...
Page 690 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-82: Step 2 for Delta Cal For its functionality, see "Delta Cal dock widget panel" on page 641 and "Delta Cal Advanced Settings" on page 650. Coupon A / Coupon B section In the "Coupon A"...
Page 691 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Test coupon type Single-ended Balanced "Sym 2x Thru" "1x Open" "1x Short" Use the Balanced Ports dialog to create the single-ended and balanced ports that are required for the measurements. There are several rules to be considered with the coupon measurement interface. ●...
Page 692 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool DUT + Fixture section After you have measured the coupons or loaded their data from file, you can proceed with the DUT and test fixture assembly. Either measure the assembly, or load its data from file.
Page 693 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool The deembedding of single-ended and decoupled ports is assigned as Single Ended, the deembedding of balanced ports as Balanced, and the deembedding of coupled as Port Sets deembedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:IMPCorrect CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:PORT CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:RUN CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:FILE...
Page 694 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Generate Side 1/Generate Side2 If enabled (default), the tool generates the deembedding file for side 1 / side 2. Impedance Correction Settings Provides additional settings for the impedance correction of the Delta Cal tool. Reset to Default Resets the settings of the "Delta Cal Advanced Settings"...
Page 695 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Method Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Default is "Method 2L". For background information, see Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization. "Method 1L" handles single-ended and balanced measurement results differently; acti- vate "1L Diff. Mode" for balanced measurements. For "Method 2L" and "Method 3L" measurements can also be single-ended or balanced, but the tool does not distinguish between them.
Page 696 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Resonance Enables or disables the improved Delta-L algorithms that implement resonance removal. If enabled, you can specify a "Cutoff Frequency" for the high frequency curve fit. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:RESonance CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:RESonance:CUToff Frequencies Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies.
Page 697 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Sweep Frequency Defines the sweep range of the Delta-L channel. The entered "Minimum" and "Maxi- mum" values are set as start and stop frequency when the Delta-L settings are applied using "OK". Furthermore, the VNA collects data for the LPI computation a the "Mini- mum"...
Page 698 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool 5.13.11.2 Delta-L measurement When the Delta-L measurement starts, the analyzer firmware prepares the Delta-L measurement channel, populates the diagram area with the required measurement traces, and opens the Delta-L Measurement dock widget. Delta-L Measurement dock widget The "Delta-L Measurement"...
Page 699 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Measure ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Measures the full set of S-parameters at the selected ports (full 2- or 4-port). Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure Ports table ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Use the controls in the "Active"...
Page 700 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Offset Embed softtool Delta-L diagram Upon successfully running the external AITT-DL tool, the VNA displays the "Delta-L" diagram. 2L and 3L For "Method 2L" and "Method 3L", the "Delta-L" diagram includes two traces for every combination of lines/lengths (12 for "Method 2L";...
Page 701 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 5.14 File softtool The "File" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: System –...
Page 702 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool 5.14.1 Recall sets tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml). For background information, see Section 4.1.2, "Recall sets",...
Page 703 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool The R&S ZNB3000 supports two recall set file formats: ● znx (default) Binary file format, introduced with the R&S ZNB ● znxml XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA Adds a new setup. The default names for new setups are "Set1", "Set2" etc. Recall sets are accessible via tabs in the diagram area: Tip: To open an existing recall set, use "Open Recall...".
Page 704 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool Select "Cancel" to abort the recall process or "OK" to open the Restore Switch Matrix Configuration dialog that guides you through the required configuration changes. Note: In case the recall set could only be loaded after adjusting some incompatible settings, the info message "The setup data changed while loading"...
Page 705 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool In the dialog, proceed as follows: 1. Reassign Matrices: For each "Matrix in Recall Set", select a switch matrix of the same (driver) type as "Assigned Matrix". If no switch matrix of the same type exists, select "Switch Matrix" to open the Exter- nal Matrices dialog that allows you to register/configure additional switch matrices.
Page 706 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool It is a read-only version of the Switch Matrix RF Connections dialog you can later use to modify the actual configuration. 5.14.2 Favorites tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e.: ●...
Page 707 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool The firmware can manage up to 6 favorites. New favorites are always created at the topmost spare position in the favorites list. If the list is complete (i.e. if there are no more spare positions), new favorites can only be added after existing ones were removed.
Page 708 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool To File... Opens the "Save Image" dialog that allows you to select a graphics file type (*.bmp, *.jpg | *.jpeg, *.pdf, *.png, *.svg) and to save diagram con- tent to a file of this type (see also "Save Dialog"...
Page 709 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool The HCOPy... commands provide the printer settings; see Section 7.3.7, "HCOPy commands", on page 1207. 5.14.4.1 Content tab The "Content" tab allows you to select the diagram content to be printed. The selected item in the " Print Charts" group specifies how the diagram area of the active recall set is printed.
Page 710 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool If selected in the "Print other information" group, the content of the "Info Table" (see "Info Table: Show / Position" on page 795) and/or "Setup Info" (see "Setup tab" on page 820) is printed on additional pages. 5.14.4.2 Printer tab The "Printer"...
Page 711 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool 5.14.5 Trace Data tab Section 5.5.11, "Trace Data tab", on page 375. 5.14.6 More tab The buttons on the "More" tab allow you to load simulation data or close the VNA appli- cation. Loading simulation data and adding simulation noise is only available for the PC firm- ware simulation (see Section 4.7.33, "R&S...
Page 712 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool Config Additional Simulation Data... Allows you to import port-specific simulation data into the current channel (firmware simulation only; see Simulation data). Opens the Configure Additional Simulation Data dialog. Simulation Noise Allows you to add random noise to the loaded simulation data to let the traces appear more "realistic"...
Page 713 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool The source data files (first column), the mapping between physical ports and data file ports (second column), and the S-parameters to be overwritten (third column) can be defined during Add/Insert. The text box below the table shows the full path to the data file of the selected row.
Page 714 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool By selecting "Open", you proceed to Step 2: Assign alias ports from file, "Cancel" dis- cards the import definition. Step 2: Assign alias ports from file ← Add/Insert The "Assign Alias Ports from File" dialog allows you to select the physical VNA ports whose simulated S-parameter data you want to overwrite ("Enabled"), and their related ports in the selected data file ("Alias File Port").
Page 715 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool Select at least one trace to enable the "Ok" button. Selecting "Ok" applies, selecting "Cancel" discards your import definition. Remote command: MMEMory:SIMulation:SDATa<Idx> MMEMory:SIMulation:SDATa<Idx>:LOAD Delete/Delete All Deletes the selected or all additional imports. Remote command: MMEMory:SIMulation:SDATa<Idx>:DELete MMEMory:SIMulation:DELete:ALL Export snp...
Page 716 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 File softtool 5.14.8 Report tab The buttons on the "Report" tab allow you to generate a PDF report containing the dia- grams of the active setup and the content of the "Info Table" (see "Info Table: Show / Position"...
Page 717 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Figure 5-84: Chart Selection dialog The selected item in the " Print Charts" group specifies how the diagram area of the active recall set is printed. Currently the following options are offered: "Active Diagram only", "All diagrams on one page", "All diagrams on their own page"...
Page 718 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.1 External Tools application The "External Tools" application gives access to pre-installed and user-defined external tools. Access: System – [Tools] > "External Tools" GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts.
Page 719 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Screen Keyboard Opens the Windows "On-Screen Keyboard". This tool allows you to enter characters, in particular letters, if an input field cannot call up the analyzer's own on-screen key- board, and if no external keyboard is connected. ®...
Page 720 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The "TDR Setup" contains the following sections/controls: ● "TDR Wizard..." Opens the "TDR Wizard" (see Section 5.15.2.2, "TDR Wizard", on page 720) ● "Topology" Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Section 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog",...
Page 721 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Step 1: Port Topology The "Port Topology" step allows you to set up the (balanced) port configuration, similar to the Balanced Ports dialog. ≤ 4 physical ports) Figure 5-85: Port Topology step ( User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 722 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Figure 5-86: Port Topology step (> 4 physical ports) Select "Next" to proceed to Step 2: Stimulus Settings. Step 2: Stimulus Settings The "Stimulus Settings" step gives access to the basic settings of the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog and allows you to select the time domain measurements to be per-...
Page 723 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.2.3 TDR Stimulus Settings dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation. Access: System – [Tools] > "TDR" > "TDR Setup" > "Stimulus..." After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the lower part of the dialog, as can be seen in the screenshot below.
Page 724 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Controls in the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog Figure 5-87: TDR Stimulus Settings dialog The "TDR Stimulus Settings" dialog offers basic settings. Instead of specifying the sweep parameters directly, they are derived from time domain properties of the DUT. After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the dialog.
Page 725 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec- tric with permittivity ε , relative to its velocity in a vacuum (velocity factor < 1). Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters, i.e. setting one of them deter- mines the other.
Page 726 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool For additional settings, see Section 5.5.5, "Time Domain tab", on page 356. Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNB3000, "IF Bandwidth" and "Aver- age Factor" determine the operation of the related R&S ZNB3000 receiver. For a description and related remote control commands, see Section 5.9, "Power Bw Avg softtool",...
Page 727 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Advanced Settings... If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Advanced Settings..." button opens the Advanced Settings dialog that allows in-depth configuration of the simulated digital sig- nal generator and receiver. Display Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Display Measurements"...
Page 728 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The following measurement results can be selectively enabled/disabled: ● "Basic" – Eye Minimum, Eye Maximum, Eye Base, Eye Top, Eye Mean, Eye Ampli- tude, Eye Height, Eye Width For PAM signals (see "Modulation" on page 731) Eye Height and Eye Width are not available.
Page 729 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Access: System – [Tools] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Eye Diagram..." For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation, see Section 5.15.2.6, "Advanced Settings dialog", on page 732. Measurement / Topology "Measurement" allows you to select an S-Parameter, i.e. the transmission (or reflec- tion) whose time domain properties you want to analyze.
Page 730 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool For a user defined Stream, the length can be specified in terms of bits, Kibits (2^10 bits), Mibits (2^20 bits), Gibits (2^30 bits). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length is reached.
Page 731 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Modulation Defines the modulation of the generated bit stream (NRZ, PAM-4, PAM-8 or PAM-16). Note that for a modulation type other than NRZ, eye masks and eye mask tests are not available (the buttons on the Eye Mask Test tab are grayed out).
Page 732 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool No occurrence (value 0) is always displayed fully transparent with the background being visible. Remote command: DISPlay:CMAP:EYE:TCHigh:RGB DISPlay:CMAP:EYE:TCLow:RGB OK / Cancel "OK" enables/modifies the eye diagram, "Cancel" leaves the Eye Diagram dialog with- out applying possible changes.
Page 733 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Generator The "Generator Settings" dialog gives full access to the "virtual" signal generator of the related eye diagram simulation. Most of the settings are also available in the Eye Dia- gram dialog. Access: "Generator" button in the Advanced Settings dialog Simulated Bit Pattern / Simulated Rise Time Section 5.15.2.5, "Eye Diagram...
Page 734 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Access: "Emphasis" button in the Advanced Settings dialog In transmission systems known losses of the channel are typically compensated already in the transmitter. The most common setting is to boost high frequencies com- pared to low frequencies since the channels show typically larger losses for high fre- quencies.
Page 735 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The FIR filter coefficients are found by solving the equations: – c – c = Va – c = Vb = Vc = Vd subject to the normalization condition | c | + | c | + | c | + | c | = 1.
Page 736 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Four types of jitter can be configured and selectively enabled: random, periodic, Dirac and user defined. If enabled, the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period, and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog. Active This button must be first enabled to activate any of the jitter sources.
Page 737 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:DELTa CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability User Specific The "Load Jitter" button allows the user to open a "Jitter File (*.txt)" with each entry in the file equal to the jitter to be added at each symbol period. Such a Jitter File must be a 7-bit ASCII compatible text file;...
Page 738 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Active Enables/disables noise insertion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe Defines the root mean square noise level. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS The "Define DUT" dialog allows you to switch between different transmission (and reflection) paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties. In addition, it allows you to switch between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response), which can be useful when configuring the other eye diagram blocks (see...
Page 739 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE Equalization The "Define Equalization" dialog allows you to activate and define a continuous time linear equalization at the receive side for the simulated eye diagram measurement.
Page 740 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.2.7 Eye Mask Test tab If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "Eye Mask Test" tab allows you to set up an eye mask for it, to enable testing against this mask and to export the test results.
Page 741 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Export Test Results Opens a dialog that allows the user to save the mask test results to an ASCII file. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:EYE:MASK:RESults Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass Section 5.6.1, "Limit Test tab", on page 385...
Page 742 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Polygon Setup Allows you to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test. The center polygon can either be an octagon, a hexagon, or a rectangle ("Shape" combo-box). The sizes of the polygon can be set using the main/minor widths and heights as shown in the corresponding visualization.
Page 743 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Figure 5-92: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 5-93: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─...
Page 744 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off- sets are specified relative to this point. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:VERTical CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:VERTical Mask Center Defines the center point of the eye mask: ●...
Page 745 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool [MASK CENTER] Horizontal = 0 Vertical = 0 [TEST SETTING] Fail Condition = Samples (Percent) Violation Tolerance = 1 Violation Percent = 10 Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:EYE:MASK MMEMory:STORe:EYE:MASK Automatic Mask Generation The "Automatic Mask Generation" function attempts to size the polygon, top, and bot- tom masks in a reasonable manner based on the current eye measurement settings.
Page 746 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Start Cursor / Stop Cursor Defines the lower/upper percentage for the rise time measurement. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:THReshold Extended Info Defines whether the info field for the rise time measurement only provides basic infor- mation (default) or extended information: Figure 5-94: Rise time info, basic vs.
Page 747 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool ● The "Low Pass Step" time domain transformation Type is used (which requires the stimulus grid to be harmonic) If these conditions are not met, a message is displayed: Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:STATe Reference Trace Selects the reference trace for the skew measurement.
Page 748 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass Section 5.6.1, "Limit Test tab", on page 385 5.15.2.11 Time Gate tab Replicates the "Time Gate" tab of the "Trace Config" softtool (see Section 5.5.6, "Time Gate tab",...
Page 749 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.2.13 X Axis tab The "X Axis" tab allows you to define the x-axis scaling of the active diagram. The scal- ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types, see Section 5.4, "Scale softtool", on page 335.
Page 750 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Access: System – [Tools] > "Noise Figure" ● Noise figure measurement is provided with software option R&S ZNB3-K30. If this option is not installed, the "Noise Figure" tab is not available. ● Noise figure measurement is not available for frequency-converting DUTs. Background information Refer to Section 4.7.8, "Noise figure...
Page 751 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool New NF Channel/Convert Ch<n> to NF Channel Creates a NF channel or converts the current channel to a NF channel. The channel info changes accordingly: Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]NFIGure:DEFine NF Parameter/NF21 The "NF Parameter" combo-boxes select the NF parameter to be measured in the cur- rent trace.
Page 752 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, 'b1/a2(P2)' | 'b1/a3(P3)' | ... | 'b2/a1(P1)' | 'b2/a3(P3)' | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>, 'b1/a2(P2)' | 'b1/a3(P3)' | ... | 'b2/a1(P1)' | 'b2/a3(P3)' | ... Add Trace "Add Trace" on page 342. Power Leveling Opens the Power Leveling dialog...
Page 753 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool DUT Gain Allows you to specify the (maximum) gain of your DUT. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:NFIGure:PLEVeling:DGAin Ref. Receiving Power "Ref. Receiving Power" on page 757. Reveiving Port Pmax Specifies the intended maximum power at the receiving VNA port (port 2 for NF Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:NFIGure:PLEVeling:RMAX Receiving Attenuation...
Page 754 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Gain Det Time Sets the detector time at each measurement point for the average detector, which is used for the measurement of the DUT gain. Using the AVG detector allows you to remove statistical fluctuations from the measurement and therefore achieves a more accurate result.
Page 755 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]NFIGure:IFConst:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]NFIGure:IFConst Sideband Correction In this section, you can compensate for the imperfect response of the VNA receivers. "Harmonic correction" on page 243 for a detailed description. However, the overall influence on the calculated NF does not only depend on the receivers but also on the DUT.
Page 756 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]NFIGure:VIRejection[:STATe] 5.15.3.5 Cal Settings tab The "Cal Settings" tab allows you to specify noise figure calibration settings such as power levels and detector times. General Cal Settings > Factor/Avg. Defines the averaging factor and enables/disables averaging during a noise figure cali- bration.
Page 757 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:NFIGure:CALibration:APOWer Ref. Receiving Power ← Cal Power Settings Defines the source power the R&S ZNB3000 uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration. See "Reference Receiver Cal Power" on page 550.
Page 758 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.4.1 Controls on the Distance to Fault tab The controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab allow you to enable and configure a stan- dard Distance to Fault (DtF) measurement. A standard DtF measurement is prepared in the order from top to bottom: 1.
Page 759 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool When activating "Distance to Fault", the analyzer proceeds as follows: ● Set S as measured quantity of the active trace ● Propose a reflection normalization at port p (see "Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal...
Page 760 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The required number of points depends on: ● The frequency span Δf = f – f (see "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Cen- stop start ter Frequency / Span Frequency" on page 427), ●...
Page 761 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal... (P2) Refl OSM Sets up and runs the "Calibration Unit"/"Calibration Setting" wizard to perform a full one-port calibration at physical port 2 (only port 2 enabled and calibration type "Refl OSM"...
Page 762 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool ● When the "Fault Limit" is modified, the new "Fault Limit" replaces other limit lines (see Section 5.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines dialog", on page 389) ● This field is only enabled, if Fault Limit Check is active.
Page 763 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool For predefined cables, the table is read-only. Access: Available Cable Types... dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNB3000 calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f center The frequency dependence can be defined in two alternative ways:...
Page 764 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 5.15.4.3 Fault List dock widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 5-96: Fault List dock widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active...
Page 765 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool ● "Active Channel" The table displays the faults of all Distance to Fault traces in the active channel (if any). ● "Active Trace" The table displays the faults of the active trace (in case it is a Distance to Fault trace) .
Page 766 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool If option R&S ZNB3-K100 is missing, the "SNP Assistant" application is not available. 5.15.5.1 Controls on the SNP Assistant tab New... Creates an SNPA project and opens it in the SNP Assistant DUT Topology view.
Page 767 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Note: An SNPA project not only comprises the DUT setup (topology, port numbering and labeling) and the measurement setup (scope, sweep settings, data state), but also the available data – no matter if measured or loaded from Touchstone file. Remote command: [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:SAVE Export snp File...
Page 768 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Table 5-9: DUT structures Buttons Description SCPI enum constants Single-ended terminated structures D1, D1R Balanced terminated structures D2D, D2DR (isolated physical ports) Single-ended and balanced through struc- D2 and D4 tures Mixed mode through structures D3, D3R Clicking a button adds the corresponding structure to the DUT topology...
Page 769 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Left Side Label/Right Side Label ← DUT topology table The DUT is modeled with a left and a right side. Entering a descriptive text for each side facilitates identifying a port during configuration and measurement. Remote command: [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:DUT:PREFix Wiring ←...
Page 770 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool You can select the same structures as for Structure. "Delete"/"Delete All" deletes the currently selected structure or all structures, respec- tively. "Move Up"/"Move Down" moves the currently selected structure one position up/ down in the DUT topology table, without changing the port numbering or other proper- ties of the affected structures.
Page 771 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Use "Select Ports..." to limit the ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices that are available for measuring the modeled DUT. By default, the SNPA uses all available ports – disregarding their state in the logical port configuration (recommended).
Page 772 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool This file format is portable between all Rohde & Schwarz network analyzers supporting the SNPA feature (option K100). However, on a R&S ZNA it requires firmware version 3.0, and on a R&S ZNB3000, R&S ZNB, R&S ZNBT or R&S ZND it requires firmware version 4.0.
Page 773 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool S-matrix panel The quadratic S-matrix panel in the top-left part of the SNPA overview visualizes the data state of the DUT's S-matrix. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 774 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Port labeling ← S-matrix panel The rows and columns of the S-matrix panel represent the physical DUT ports, ordered port number. The ports are labeled according to your settings in the topology table: [<Side Label>] [<Wiring>] [<Identity>] [<Polarity>] [<Label>] (<Port number>) For example, a DUT structure and labeling like this...
Page 775 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Data states ← S-matrix panel Each small square in the S-matrix panel represents a (single-ended) S-parameter, whose data state is indicated by the square's background color (see "Color Legend" on page 781). ● Imported: The S-parameter data were imported from Touchstone file ●...
Page 776 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Quick Set ← S-Parameters "Unmeasure All"/"Idealize All" sets the entire S-matrix to "Unmeasured"/"Idealized" state. Remote command: on page 1418 [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:DUT:INIT:RANGe Data ← S-Parameters Select "Import" to browse for a Touchstone file to import S-parameter data from. If the integrity check passes, the SNPA prompts you with the "Data Importer"...
Page 777 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:DUT:INIT:IDEalize [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:DUT:INIT:MEASure Transmission/Reflections ← Shortcuts Refer to transmission and reflection S-parameters within a DUT structure, respec- tively (see "Add Structure" on page 767). Table 5-10: S-parameter selection using Transmission/Reflection (sequential port numbering) Structure* "Transmission"...
Page 778 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Structure* "Transmission" "Reflection" n.a. User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 779 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Structure* "Transmission" "Reflection" * sequential port numbering. Note that the "Transmission" and "Reflections" patterns depend on the port numbering. Balun Balanced Side ← Shortcuts This button is only enabled if you have defined mixed structures in the DUT (balanced- to-single-ended or single-ended-to-balanced).
Page 780 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool left = "Transmission" + "Reflection" S-parameters right = "Crosstalk" S-parameters NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)/FEXT (Far-End Crosstalk)/Crosstalk Intention ← Shortcuts Which S-parameters are related to "NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)", and which ones to "FEXT (Far-End Crosstalk)", depends on your DUT model and the selected "Crosstalk Intention".: ●...
Page 781 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool The V/A pattern above represents the crosstalk intention "As specified by topology wir- ing". Sweep Settings The sweep settings of the current SNPA project. For a description of the parameters, Section 5.10, "Sweep Softtool", on page 435.
Page 782 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool "Default Colors" resets the scheme to its default colors. Assistant controls Use the "Previous" button to go back to the SNP Assistant DUT Topology view. Use the "Start" button to proceed to the SNP Assistant Measurements dock widget.
Page 783 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool In the example above, we have a 4-port VNA and a DUT with two balanced through structures (DUT ports 1 to 4 and 5 to 8). The data of the second structure were already imported from Touchstone file (blue color in the original color scheme.
Page 784 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool Necessary cable and termination changes are indicated in red, with an arrow symbol (→) next to the DUT port number. The names of the ports follow the labeling scheme of the S-matrix panel in the Assistant Overview.
Page 785 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool ● If none of the step's S-parameters is in "Unmeasured" state, the "Start Sweep" but- ton is disabled. Use the Clear Step button if you want to repeat some of the mea- surements, or replace imported by measured data. Remote command: [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:STEP<pos>:MEASure Clear Step...
Page 786 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Tools softtool 5.15.5.5 Integrity check The "SNP Assistant Integrity Check" ensures consistent S-parameter data within the SNPA project. Currently, the check focuses on identical – or at least compatible – sweep settings. As long as the project does not contain S-parameter data, i.e. if none of the project's S- parameters is in "Measured"...
Page 787 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool If the check fails, you can either adjust the channel's sweep settings to the project's sweep settings and continue with the measurement sweep ("Restore Integrity"), or "Cancel" the measurement sweep. Remote command: [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:MINTegrity? [SENSe:]SNPMeasure:MINTegrity:RESTore 5.16 Display softtool The "Display"...
Page 788 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Active Diagram Selects the active diagram. Each recall set screen can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a vari- able number of traces. One of these diagrams and traces is active at each time. The diagram number (or name) in the upper right corner of the active diagram is highligh- ted.
Page 789 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Delete Diagram Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. The remaining diagrams are renumbered; each recall set always contains diagrams with contiguous numbers. "Delete Diag Area" is disabled if the recall set contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
Page 790 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool The active trace and active channel is highlighted. The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace. Tip: To hide all traces except one, activate the context menu of the respective trace name segment in the trace list and select "Hide all other Traces".
Page 791 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Some of the "Split" settings are also available in the Diagram tab. Refer to the following sections: ● "Overlay All" on page 789 ● "Split All" on page 790 Dual Split / Triple Split / Quad Split Splits the diagram area into two (three / four) diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams.
Page 792 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZNB3000 provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height. ●...
Page 793 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool 5.16.3 Config tab Displays or hides controls and information elements of the screen and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams. Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
Page 794 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool The following predefined color schemes can be appropriate for generating black and white hardcopies of the screen: ● "Black and White Line Styles" sets a white background color. All traces and infor- mation elements in the diagram areas are black, however, the traces are drawn in different line styles.
Page 795 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Remote command: DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] Info Table: Show / Position Shows or hides the info table and defines its position. The info table is a possible container for info fields and can be placed to the bottom, to the left, or to the right of the screen.
Page 796 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Element Selects the diagram element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
Page 797 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments. The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
Page 798 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool Remote command: Display color scheme only DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way.
Page 799 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool To disambiguate the displayed marker info fields, you can assign descriptive names to the markers (see "Marker Name" on page 406). If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window".
Page 800 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Display softtool 5.16.4 View Bar tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously. Menu Bar Toggles the visibility of the "Menu Bar".
Page 801 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool For background information, see Section 3.3.2.2, "Toolbar", on page 46. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:TOOLs[:STATe] Additional Function: Minimize/Mazimize the Softtool Panel The softtool panel can be minimized/maximized via the "X"/hamburger icon in its top- right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:STOols[:STATe] 5.16.5 Touchscreen tab...
Page 802 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool 5.17.1 Setup tab Gives access to system-wide properties, settings, resources and service functions. 5.17.1.1 Controls on the Setup tab The following buttons in the "Setup" tab open related dialogs: ● "System Config...": System Config dialog ●...
Page 803 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Currently the following encodings are supported: ANSI (default), UTF-8, Shift JIS. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:CODec Standards Opens the Standards dialog dialog, offering predefined SCPI-based instrument setup scripts for various industry standards. 5.17.1.2 System Config dialog The "System Config"...
Page 804 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Preset vs. factory reset A "Preset" replaces the current measurement setups by a setup loaded from a prede- fined or user-defined recall set. Global (persistent) settings are not affected. To reset the global settings, you can use the "Reset Factory State" script that can be accessed from the instrument's program group in the Windows "Start"...
Page 805 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Preset Configuration Specifies whether the preset action performs a factory preset or restores a user preset file. A user preset file is an arbitrary recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml), that can be cre- ated from the active setup using System – [File Print] > "Save...". If the current user preset file is not found (e.g.
Page 806 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Auto Power Reduction for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active. Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration.
Page 807 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Search Path for additional Cal Kits and Connector Types Contains the name and path of a special directory for cal kit files (*.calkit). All cal kit files in the special directory are loaded automatically as predefined kits (i.e. read- only kits which cannot be modified) every time the VNA application is started.
Page 808 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Transparent Info Fields Enables or disables transparent info fields for markers and trace statistics. Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace. Remote command: n.a. Show Sweep Symbols Turns sweep symbols on or off. Sweep symbols are arrows pointing downward onto the trace.
Page 809 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:XLABels Number of Trace Colors Defines the maximum number of trace colors (trace properties for the user defined color scheme). Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACes:CCOunt Decimal Places Defines the number of fractional digits for quantities with different physical units. The settings affect entries and results, e.g.
Page 810 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Channel Bits (Decimal) Entry of the 8-bit decimal value (0 ... 255) for the selected channel. The channel bits control eight output signals at the USER PORT connector. The signals are 3.3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 256 independent analyzer states.
Page 811 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband (see "Bandfilter search" on page 98). If "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" is enabled, the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used, otherwise their arithmetic mean.
Page 812 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Touchstone Export Options Configures whitespace insertion during legacy Version 1.1 (ZNx) Touchstone file export. The default export format is explained in Section 4.4.2.1, "Touchstone files", on page 140: ● Logical columns are vertically aligned using spaces ●...
Page 813 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:STATe Info / Warning / Error ← Show Messages ← Instrument Messages Selectively disables/enables display of information popups for the related event type. If information popups are globally switched off (Instrument Messages disabled), these buttons are disabled.
Page 814 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool "Point AGC" Legacy AGC algorithm: gain control pre-measurement at every sweep point. Typically significantly slower than "Memory AGC". Remote command: SYSTem:AGC:GLOBal:METHod Minimum Settling Delay Defines the minimum settling delay for external generators. The delay is enforced: ●...
Page 815 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool as if the channel base power was set to its minimum possible value. The config- ured settling delay is applied. ● "Keep" is intended for power sweeps. If enabled, at sweep end the output power of the last measurement point is kept.
Page 816 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Common controls State (Device Utilization)/Status Enables/disables the HUMS service. The "Status" LED indicates the current state of the HUMS service: ● Gray: inactive ● Green: up and running If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings.
Page 817 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool An SNMP community represents a collection of devices and agents grouped to monitor them. Authorized managers and the managed devices belong to an SNMP community. You can specify different communities for read-write and read-only access. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW...
Page 818 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Add / Delete (Trash) / Delete All ● To add a new device tag, select the "Add" button and enter the "Key" and "Value strings". The "Key" must be unique. ● To delete a single device tag, select the trash icon in the corresponding row. ●...
Page 819 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool User Manual 1179.7491.02 ─ 04...
Page 820 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file that you can send to R&S Sup- port for fault diagnosis; see Section 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support", on page 1647.
Page 821 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description, the option key and key type, and the activation and expiration date (if applicable). Remote command: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? *OPT? Hardware tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings.
Page 822 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Instrument Information Provides basic information on the instrument, its firmware and operating system. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? Configured External Switch Matrices The "Hardware" tab also provides information about connected switch matrices. In par- ticular, for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported (if suppor- ted by the matrix).
Page 823 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Cal Validation tab Displays the result of the last cal validation. See "Cal Validation ..." on page 462. Service tab Allows you to read or specify service-related information. This information can be read R&S HUMS, however, it does not require the corresponding option R&S ZNB3- K980.
Page 824 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Next Calibration Due The date (and time) the instrument needs calibration to be done. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE Recommended Calibration Interval Queries the recommended calibration interval, set by Rohde&Schwarz service. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval? Last Service The last date (and time) the instrument was serviced.
Page 825 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Recall Allows you to load an operators check definition from an existing "OperatorsCheck XML" (*.opch) file. Such a file can be created with the Save function of the "Operators Check" wizard. Save Saves the current "Operators Check" definition to a "OperatorsCheck XML" (*.opch) file.
Page 826 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Execute/Repeat Executes the self-test for the first time in this "Operators Check" wizard session, or repeats it. Remote command: SYSTem:OPCHeck:SELFtest? Power Check page In case you selected "Power Check" on the Welcome page, you can configure and run port power checks from this page.
Page 827 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool The upper part of the page allows you to define the checks, which can then be run with the "Execute" button. The results are displayed in the "Log" area. Figure 5-99: Log area The power check is not a complete verification of the instrument's performance.
Page 828 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Power check definition For each physical VNA port, you can decide whether to perform a power check ("Active"), whether to use default or custom settings ("Default Settings"), and whether you want to ask the firmware to "Prompt before every port check". Active Defines whether a power test shall be executed for the related port.
Page 829 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Execute/Repeat Executes or repeats the "Active" port power tests with their current limit line and power level settings. The firmware displays the relevant a- and b-wave traces, limit lines and PASS/FAIL results and in the diagram area: The PASS/FAIL results are also written to the area.
Page 830 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Print Allows you to print the "Summary" of the executed tests, similar to the Print... function- ality of the system "Info" dialog. Report Same functionality as Create R&S Support Information in the system "Info" dialog. 5.17.1.5 Service Function dialog The "Service Function"...
Page 831 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Access: [~Setup] > "Setup" > "Service Function..." Most of the service functions require a service level > 0 that is protected by a pass- word. Those service functions should be used by a Rohde & Schwarz service repre- sentative only.
Page 832 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Description tab Provides a description of the selected "Preset" script, specifying the requirements for successful execution (number of ports, frequency range, available options, ...). The predefined scripts do not stop on minor errors, such as an insufficient maximum frequency.
Page 833 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool In the screenshot above, you can see the script using IECWin variable definitions (@DEFINE ...), conditional command execution (@if <condition> ... @else ...) and user interaction (@USERQUERY ...). Advanced Settings tab Allows you to configure how the script is executed: ●...
Page 834 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: Internal/External Selects the internal or an external reference clock signal for synchronization. ● Internal: The analyzer synchronizes to its internal 10 MHz reference clock. Use the REF OUT connector at the rear of the instrument to synchronize other devices (e.g.
Page 835 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool The button opens the Windows "Network Connections" system config dialog that allows you to configure the IP4 (and IP6) settings of your instrument. GPIB Address Defines the analyzer's GPIB address. The address must be in the range between 0 and 30.
Page 836 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:IDENtify SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory SYSTem:FORMat:IDENtify SYSTem:OPTions[:STRing] SYSTem:OPTions:FACTory FORMat:BORDer Advanced ... Opens a dialog that allows to set the following parameters: ● "Wait for Data after Sweep" determines the execution behavior of INITiate[:IMMediate] commands (see Section 7.3.8, "INITiate commands", on page 1213).
Page 837 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Section 4.7.29, "External power meters", on page 261 ● Section 4.7.30, "External generators", on page 263 ● Section 4.5.5, "Automatic calibration", on page 171 5.17.4.1 Controls on the External Devices tab The buttons in the "External Devices"...
Page 838 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: 5.17.4.2 External Power Meters dialog The "External Power Meters" dialog configures external power meters so that they can be used for measurements and power calibrations. Access: System – [~Setup] > "External Devices" > "Power Meters..." Access: [Cal] >...
Page 839 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Known Devices Table with all power sensors/meters the analyzer detects to be on line (i.e. connected and switched on). "Scan Instruments" refreshes the table. Select to add a power sensor/meter to the table of Configured Devices.
Page 840 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Note: Unintentional switchover to remote control When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments"...
Page 841 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool If a power meter is connected to your VNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ● "Identify" sends an identification query ("IDN?") to the specified device address to identify the type and serial number of the connected power meter and select an appropriate driver file.
Page 842 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Power Meter Select one of the connected R&S NRP power sensors to read (and change) its proper- ties. Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Power sensors R&S NRP-Z can use an s2p Touchstone file stored on the device to deembed a two-port network attached to its RF port.
Page 843 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps: 1. Connect the generator to your R&S ZNB3000 using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the generator is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection" 3.
Page 844 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured generators ("Add Device", opens the "Add External Generator" dialog) may be changed in the dialog. The following generator properties are not defined in the "Add External Generator" dia- log but configurable here: ●...
Page 845 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" will send an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Generators"...
Page 846 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool an appropriate driver file. Generator driver files (*.gen) are stored in the Resources\ExtDev subdirectory of the analyzer's program directory. Table 5-12: Interface types for external generators and address formats Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector)
Page 847 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool ● The ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, so connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNB3000. ● For background information, see Section 4.5.5.4, "Inline calibration", on page 176.
Page 848 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool 5.17.5.1 Controls on the External Ports tab The buttons in the "External Ports" panel open the following dialogs: ● "Define Ports...", see Section 5.17.5.2, "Define Physical Ports dialog", on page 848 ● "Switch Matrix...", see Section 5.17.5.3, "External Matrices dialog", on page 849...
Page 849 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool a wave, b wave, Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver, measurement receiver and generator, respectively. The receivers and generators can be freely assigned, but without reusing the same (original) physical port in different (redefined) ports. Remote command: [SENSe:]UDSParams<Pt>:PARam [SENSe:]UDSParams:ACTive...
Page 850 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool 2. If you have connected switch matrix and VNA to the LAN: a) Enable "LAN Detection". b) Select "Scan Instruments". 3. Wait until the switch matrix appears in the table of "Known Devices". 4.
Page 851 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool This state can be caused by different problems: – General communication error In this case, check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface. – Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices (see "Log Errors"...
Page 852 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool In the "Address of New Instrument" part, you can specify the required connection prop- erties: ● "Interface" selects the connection type; currently only "LAN" is available. ● "Address" specifies the IP address or hostname of the external switch matrix. If a connection can be established, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected: "Identify"...
Page 853 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Disable "Manual Configuration" if you want the device to discover its host configuration via DHCP. In this case only the device's "Hostname" can be specified. In "Manual Configuration" mode also the unit's "IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and "Stan- dard Gateway"...
Page 854 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Defining switch matrix RF connections typically involves the following steps. one or more external switch matrices to the RF connection configuration. These matrices must have been registered before; see Section 5.17.5.3, "External Matrices dialog", on page 849 for details.
Page 855 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Setup softtool Remote command: n.a. Delete Opens the "Delete Switch Matrix" dialog: Select some matrices and tap "OK" to remove them from the RF connection configura- tion or tap "Cancel" to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix from the RF connection configuration.
Page 856 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Help softtool In the "Edit" dialog, define the appropriate VNA port or "Set Unused" to delete the matrix VNA port connection. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MVNA SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection, tap on the corresponding port symbol. In the "Edit"...
Page 857 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Additional function keys Access: "Help" – "Contents..." | "Index..." | "About..." from the menu bar. Contents... Opens the help browser and activates its "Contents" tab. The "Contents" tab displays the table of contents of the analyzer's online help. Index...
Page 858 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB3000 Additional function keys The data entry panel provides hardkeys for undo and redo. System – [Preset] Performs a preset of all instrument settings or of the active recall set, depending on the settings in the Presets tab of the "System Config"...
Page 859 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control 6 Remote control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Section 7, "Command...
Page 860 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control HiSLIP protocol The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is a protocol for TCP-based instru- ments specified by the IVI foundation. Compared to its predecessor VXI-11, it provides speed and other improvements. HiSLIP is encapsulated in VISA; the resource string reads TCPIP::<R&S ZNB3000 IP address>::hislip0.
Page 861 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control After the GPIB Explorer is started, the interface and protocol for the connection to the instrument can be selected in a dialog: The following options are provided: ● NT named pipe (currently not supported) ●...
Page 862 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control It remote logging is enabled (SYSTem:LOGGing:REMote[:STATe] ON) the analyzer stores all received commands to the file 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\RemoteLog'. 6.1.3 Switchover to remote control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls.
Page 863 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control In case the "Remote" softtool is not visible, tap/click on the toucscreen/application win- dow to restore it. The softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state: ●...
Page 864 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.
Page 865 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Introduction to remote control control. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are permissible. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. SCPI commands: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 6.1.3.2 Returning to manual operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control. ●...
Page 866 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages 6.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
Page 867 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
Page 868 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
Page 869 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands.
Page 870 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 6.2.3 SCPI parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
Page 871 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 6.2.3.2 Boolean parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.
Page 872 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Basic remote control concepts 6.2.3.6 Overview of syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.
Page 873 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Basic remote control concepts The following frequently used commands create and delete traces, channels, and dia- gram areas: Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>', '< Meas Parameter>' (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>'...
Page 874 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Basic remote control concepts ● The active traces for manual and remote control can be different. The following program example illustrates how to create, select and reference traces. It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen to check the effect of each step. Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no.
Page 875 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Basic remote control concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Section 6.4, "Command processing",...
Page 876 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Command processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 6-3: Mixed commands Method...
Page 877 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Command processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.
Page 878 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Command processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Section 6.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 887). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again when the new state has settled. This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing.
Page 879 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Command processing Example: Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable. Sending :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI.
Page 880 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.
Page 881 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system ● Output buffer: Contains the messages that the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB. All status registers have the same internal structure, see Structure of a SCPI status register.
Page 882 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system not used not used not used -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 14 -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 13 -&- -&- -&- not used Limit trace no.
Page 883 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register. The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can lead to a Service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
Page 884 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
Page 885 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 6.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
Page 886 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a Serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE?. 6.5.3.2 IST flag and PPE In analogy to the Service request (SRQ), the Individual STatus (IST) flag combines the...
Page 887 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Execution error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between –200 and –300, which describes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
Page 888 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower level STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register are defined as follows: Bit No. Meaning LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
Page 889 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system Refer to the Section 9, "Error messages and troubleshooting", on page 1643 for a detailed description of hardware errors including possible remedies. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register are defined as follows. Bit No.
Page 890 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Instrument temperature is too high This bit is set if the analyzer detects that the instrument temperature is too high. Reduce ambient temperature, keep ventilation holes of the casing unobstructed. OCXO cold This bit is set if the oven for the internal high precision clock (option B4) is not at its operat- ing temperature.
Page 891 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system 6.5.4 Application of the status reporting system The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices.
Page 892 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system The R&S ZNB3000 generates an SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register occurs, i.e. when any point on the first trace fails the limit check. Example: Find out which event caused an SRQ The procedure to find out which event caused an SRQ is analogous the procedure to generate an SRQ: 1.
Page 893 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Status reporting system The parallel poll method is used to find out quickly which one of the instruments con- nected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must be set to the same value.
Page 894 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts 6.5.5 Reset values of the status reporting system The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R&S ZNB3000. DCL, SDC (Device Clear, Selected Device Clear) Event Switching on DCL, SDC...
Page 895 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax for the cur- rent setting value. You can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument at any time of operation, as fol- lows: ●...
Page 896 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts Start Recording If clicked, the SCPI Recorder automatically records the required SCPI commands and parameter values for the settings and functions you use while operating the R&S ZNB3000. To view the list of currently recorded SCPI commands at any time, select the "SCPI Recorder"...
Page 897 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts Tip: You can execute the command list in an .inp file using the GPIB Explorer provi- ded with the R&S ZNB3000, see Section 6.1.2, "GPIB Explorer", on page 860. You can also reload .inp files to the script editor later.
Page 898 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts The SCPI Recorder dialog with the corresponding SCPI command appears in the "SCPI Recorder" dialog. 6.6.3 How to create and export SCPI scripts Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instru- ment and then export the script for use on the controller.
Page 899 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts c) Select the stored *.inp file. Figure 6-3: Select the recording file d) Click "Open". The stored commands appear in the editor. 3. To remove the most recently recorded command, click "Remove Last"...
Page 900 ® Remote control R&S ZNB3000 Automating tasks with remote command scripts The "SCPI Recorder" dialog with the currently recorded command list appears. 2. Click "Export As". 3. Define a file name and storage location for the script file. Note: The vector network analyzer automatically selects python as the format of the script.
Page 901 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Special terms and notation 7 Command reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.
Page 902 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Special terms and notation 7.1.1 Upper- vs. lower-case Upper-/lower-case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters.
Page 903 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Common commands The analyzer provides numeric suffixes for channels, traces, ports, markers etc. If unspecified, a numeric suffix is replaced by 1. The number of ports depends on the analyzer model. No restrictions apply to number of markers, channel, trace, and diagram suffixes.
Page 904 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Common commands Return values: <Contents> Range: 0 to 255 Usage: Query only *IDN? Identification Returns the instrument identification string of the R&S ZNB3000, including the manu- facturer, the instrument type, its serial number, and the software revision.. The identification string is editable;...
Page 905 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Common commands *PCB <Address> Pass control back Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of the triggered action. Setting parameters: <Address> Range: 0 to 30 Usage: Setting only *PRE <Value> Parallel poll register enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value.
Page 906 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 Common commands Sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is trig- gered. The query *SRE? returns the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Page 907 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference 7.3 SCPI command reference The following sections provide detailed reference information on the instrument control commands implemented by the R&S ZNB3000 network analyzer. ● CALCulate commands..................907 ● CONFigure commands..................1143 ● CONTrol commands....................1152 ●...
Page 908 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference 7.3.1.1 CALCulate:CALValidate... Commands related to Calibration validation................ 908 CALCulate:CALValidate:AVERage[:STATe] ..................908 CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat ..................908 CALCulate:CALValidate:MODE ........... 909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:LMAGnitude:LOWer ............ 909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:LMAGnitude:UPPer .............909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer ............. 909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:UPPer ............909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:LOWer ............909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:UPPer ..............909 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PRESet ..................
Page 909 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Advanced Mode" on page 530 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:LMAGnitude:LOWer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:LMAGnitude:UPPer <Port>, <Value> Defines the magnitude cal validation limits for the MLINear trace format (see CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat). Parameters: <Port> Physical analyzer port no. <Value>...
Page 910 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Validation Limits" on page 531 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN Runs the cal validation with its configured settings. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Validate" on page 530 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN:RESult? Displays the result (PASS/FAIL) of the preceding cal validation (CALCulate: CALValidate:RUN).
Page 911 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ...............916 CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:MDATa:INTerpolate ...............917 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:COUNt? ................. 917 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? ............... 918 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? ..................919 CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? ................. 919 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? ....................919 CALCulate:DATA:TRACe CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>... CALCulate<Chn>:DATA? <Format> The query reads the response values of the selected channel's active trace or reads error terms of the selected channel.
Page 912 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
Page 913 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] NCData Factory calibrated trace data: the values are obtained right after applying the fac- tory calibration but before applying a user-defined calibration (if any). [Data access point 1] UCData Uncalibrated trace data.
Page 914 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:ALL? <Format>[, <RecallSet>] Reads the current response values of all traces of the referenced recall set. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. <RecallSet>...
Page 915 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference SDATa Output as unformatted trace data; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA . Query only. FSIData Output or input at "Fixture Simulation Input" data access point. <Data> Trace data either in ASCII or block data format, depending on the current setting.
Page 916 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:DALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all data traces of the selected channel. Use to query data traces and memory traces. CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
Page 917 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:COUNt? Reads the number of completed sweeps in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: OFF). The trace can be any of the traces acquired during the single CONTinuous sweep cycle. Tip: This command can only be used for >...
Page 918 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: SWE:COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps (10) to be measured in single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF; :INIT; Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. No synchronization is necessary. if (CALC:DATA:NSW:COUN? >...
Page 919 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: SWE:COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps (10) to be measured in single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF; :INIT; *OPC? Activate the single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. Wait until the single sweep sequence is complete.
Page 920 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ● Formatted trace data (FDATa) can only be imported to "live" traces if the related channel is in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Before the import, the target trace must be prepared according to the settings used during export.
Page 921 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Extended Info" on page 747 <Data> omitted <Data> = ALL Stimulus axis: <skew time> <skew time>,<skew distance>, <X value of ref. point on current time trace>, <Y value of ref. point on current trace>, <X value of ref. point on reference trace>, <Y value of ref.
Page 922 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Skew Check On" on page 747 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:POSition <SkewPos> Defines the position of the skew measurement. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SkewPos> Skew position as integer percentage of the step size Options: R&S ZNB3-K20...
Page 923 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <SkewRefTrace> Reference trace, identified by its name (within channel <Chn>). Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Reference Trace" on page 747 7.3.1.4 CALCulate:EYE... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the eye diagram measurement provi- ded with the Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNB3-K20.
Page 924 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ............939 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe ..........939 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:VERTical ............939 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:VERTical ..............939 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:BASic ..............939 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:TIME ..........940 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal ............940 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE ..........941 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical ................941 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHOW ................941 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe ..............942 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE ............942 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance ..............942 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? ..............
Page 925 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <1|2> 1 for the "Post 1" filter tap, 2 for the "Post 2" filter tap. Parameters: <Weight> Weight relative to the "Cursor" tap *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB...
Page 926 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:DC <DC Gain> Specifies the DC gain of the CTLE (a two-pole filter with single zero) at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 927 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CTLE Zero> Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 739 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the CTLE at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 928 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Bit Stream" on page 729 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:DRATe <Rate> Defines the data rate of the bit stream generator for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 929 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Before executing this command, the pattern type must be set to PRBS (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE). Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PrbsLength> L5 | L7 | L9 | L10 | L11 | L13 | L15 | L17 | L19 | L21 | L23 | L25 | L27 | L29 | L31 Ln represents an actual sequence length of 2 - 1.
Page 930 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <VoltageLevel> Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNB3-K20...
Page 931 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition" on page 731 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:DELTa <DiracDelta> Defines the magnitude of the Dirac jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 932 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Periodic jitter insertion can be enabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE: PERiodic. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicFrequency> *RST: 10 MHz Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic"...
Page 933 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation <StdDeviation> Defines the standard deviation of the random jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 934 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Amplitude and probability of the jitter can be specified using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE: JITTer:DIRac:DELTa CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac: PROBability, respectively. Note that jitter is not applied unless the jitter functionality is activated using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 935 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Random" on page 736 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:USER <Boolean> Enables/disables user-defined jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 936 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <HorizontalOffset> Horizontal offset relative to the middle of the eye diagram Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Center" on page 744 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:CENTer:VERTical <VerticalOffset> Defines the vertical center of the eye mask in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 937 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate1:EYE:MASK:DATA? Returns something like 'Eye Mask ------------------------------ Fail Condition Type Samples Violation Tolerance 1 Total Number of Samples 10342 Mask 1 (Top) Active Samples Hits 366 Fail Rate 3.539 % Test Result Fail Mask 2 (Bottom) Not Active Samples Hits ------ Fail Rate ------...
Page 938 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Return values: <TestResults> Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 740 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition <FailCondition> Defines whether the fail condition for the eye mask test of the related eye diagram is specified in absolute or relative terms.
Page 939 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Top/Bottom Setup" on page 743 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe <Boolean> Activates/deactivates the respective area in the eye mask of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 940 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Show basic/time results OFF (0) Hide basic/time results *RST: ON (1) Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Measurements..." on page 727 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] width of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram.
Page 941 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <PolygonType> OCTogon | HEXagon | RECTangle Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 742 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram.
Page 942 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 740 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE <ViolationRate> Defines the violation rate (i.e. the share of bad samples) for the mask test in the related eye diagram.
Page 943 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference The return value is of type string and returns the eye measurement results in csv for- mat with decimal separator "." and field separator "," (see also MMEMory:STORe:EYE: MEASurements). Note that the full set of measurement results is only available for NRZ modulated gen- erator signals (see on page 929).
Page 944 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe <Boolean> Defines the visibility of the result info field in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 945 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <NoiseRMS> Default unit: V Manual operation: "RMS" on page 738 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables Gaussian noise in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 946 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB3-K20 Manual operation: "Encoder" on page 733 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass <Boolean> Enables/disables a single pole low pass filter in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram measurement. The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut: on page 930) and rise time definition (see...
Page 947 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <EyeView> STIMulus | EMPHasis | JITTer | NOISe | DUT | EQUalization The rightmost building block to be included the calculation chain STIMulus > EMPHasis > JITTer > NOISe > DUT > EQUalization. Note that the selected block must be active, for example CALCulate1:EYE:VIEW JITTER requires to be ON.
Page 948 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "Add Time Gate" on page 363 CALCulate:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:AOFFset <Boolean> Activates the operating mode where the time gate is moved in the opposite direction when the "Delay" setting is changed. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 949 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST;...
Page 950 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters: <TGName> Time gate name CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CATalog? query for existing time gate names. Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Delete Time Gate" on page 363 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:LINK <TraceName>...
Page 951 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming) Maximum - Maximum flatness (Bohman) *RST: WIDE...
Page 952 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <Span> Span of the time gate. Range: 2E-012 s to 200 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer Manual operation: "Gate Span" on page 359 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime>...
Page 953 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0) Time gating disabled ON (1) Time gating enabled *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT? CALC:FILT:TIME:STAT? Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the default trace is displayed in the time domain and whether the time gate is enabled.
Page 954 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference It specifies the window shape of this time gate. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT Steepest edges (rectangle) HANN Normal gate (Hann) HAMMing...
Page 955 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Apply" on page 642 CALCulate:FMODel:DCAL:CREate:CHANnel Creates a Delta Cal deembedding channel. to query its channel number CALCulate:FMODel:DCAL:REQuest:CHANnel? and use it to perform the on-fixture calibration (Delta Cal) in this channel. Usage: Event Manual operation:...
Page 956 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference <Path> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon: <LEFT|RIGHt>:TYPE OPSHort1x, you have to load a file for OPEN1x and SHORt1x (or measure it). Otherwise only for the selected coupon type.
Page 957 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:TYPE <CouponType> CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:TYPE <CouponType> For fixture modeling with the deembedding assistant, this command selects a test cou- pon to be measured for the lead-in/lead-out, or loaded from file. The valid test coupons depend on the selected deembedding tool (CALCulate: FMODel:DEASsistant:TOOL).
Page 958 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "DUT + Fixture section" on page 657 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure Measures DUT + fixture at the ports defined using CALCulate:FMODel: DEASsistant:DUT:PORT. Usage: Event Manual operation: "DUT + Fixture section" on page 657 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:PORT <Position>, <PortNum>...
Page 959 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference 1 x 1 balanced BXSE 1 x balanced, 1 x single-ended (ISD only) SE21 2 x 1 single-ended (ISD only) SE22 2 x 2 single-ended (ISD only) NXSE n x single-ended (ISD only) NXMSe n x m single-ended (ISD only) n x balanced (ISD only)
Page 960 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference MULTiport Currently only supported for ISD Manual operation: "Left: Model A / Right: Model A|B" on page 652 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:IMPCorrect <Boolean> Activates impedance correction during DUT + test fixture measurement. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | 1 Impedance correction activated OFF | 0 Impedance correction deactivated...
Page 961 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference This simplification is allowed for two-sided DUTs using the same coupon model for the left and right side (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT| RIGHt:TYPE). Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) | OFF (0), where ON means only the left coupon model is measured (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon: LEFT:MEASure) or loaded from file...
Page 962 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ........... 965 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:SELected ................966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode ................ 966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:FILename ................ 966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:FILename ................ 966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:FILename ................966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:LENGth ................966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:LENGth ................966 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:LENGth ................. 967 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure ................. 967 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure ................. 967 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure ...............
Page 963 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:CURRent? Returns the frequencies at which the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties. You can use the algorithm's default or custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel: DELT:FREQuencies:USEDefault). Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies"...
Page 964 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USEDefault <Boolean> Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies. This command specifies whether to use the tool's default frequencies or custom fre- quencies, which can be defined using CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FRE commands.
Page 965 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies: USEDefault). This command clears the list of custom frequencies. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies"...
Page 966 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, relative to the cache directory. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Clear All 1L Measurements/Clear Selected 1L Measure- ments" on page 699 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode <Boolean>...
Page 967 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Length" on page 699 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure Measures the full set of S-parameters at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMO Del:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L|M2L|M3L[:STATe]). Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Measure"...
Page 968 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference *RST: SINGleended Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Measurements" on page 695 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:METHod <Method> Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Parameters: <Method> M1L | M2L | M3L One-, two-, or three-line/length analysis Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation:...
Page 969 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:RESonance:CUToff <Frequency> If resonance removal is enabled (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:RESonance ON, this command defines the cutoff frequency. Parameters: <Frequency> Cutoff frequency *RST: 25 GHz Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Resonance" on page 696 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:RUN Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings.
Page 970 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Sweep Control" on page 696 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:SWEep:CONTrol:STEP? For the Delta-L measurement, the firmware can either use a default frequency step size, or the active channel setting (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:SWEep:CONTrol This query returns the resulting frequency step size.
Page 971 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference OFF (0) Display all traces in a single diagram. Options: R&S ZNB3-K231 Manual operation: "Trace" on page 697 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:TDR <Boolean> If the Time domain analysis option R&S ZNB3-K2 is installed, this command allows you to add the TDR-based converted impedance traces to the recommended trace configu- ration.
Page 972 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ................977 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:RUN:RUN ..............977 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Pt>:RUN[:STATe] ..............978 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:SURFace CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:CAUSality <Causality> Suffix: <Ph_pt> Parameters: <Causality> Options: R&S ZNB3-K210 Manual operation: "Causality Correction" on page 649 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the Easy De-embedding (EZD) tool, this command starts the measurement of the symmetrical 2xThru coupon at the active ports (see on page 973).
Page 973 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows you to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This must be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: EZD:COUPon:MEASure).
Page 974 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows you to measure "DUT + Test Fixture" at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT[: STATe]) Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB3-K210 Manual operation: "Measure"...
Page 975 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:FASTmode <Boolean> Suffix: <Ph_pt> Parameters: <Boolean> Options: R&S ZNB3-K210 Manual operation: "Fast Mode" on page 648 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:GENerate:SIDE<1|2> <Boolean> Tells the EZD tool to create fixture deembedding data at side 1, at side 2, or at both sides.
Page 976 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance <Boolean> Switches the impedance correction of the EZD tool ON or OFF. Its reference impe- dance and bandwidth limit parameters can be set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD: and CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit, IMPedance:REFerence respectively. This is a global setting. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 977 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the EZD tool. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB3-K210 Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 637 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:RUN:RUN Runs the EZD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ●...
Page 978 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:SURFace <SurfaceRoughness> Suffix: <Ph_pt> Parameters: <SurfaceRoughness> Options: R&S ZNB3-K210 Manual operation: "Surface Roughness RMS" on page 649 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD... Commands for AtaiTec's In Situ De-Embedding (ISD) tool, see http://ataitec.com/prod- ucts/isd/..............979 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:ATTenuation:BEHavior ..............979 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure .............
Page 979 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:ATTenuation:BEHavior <AttenuationBehavior> Sets/gets the linear_2x batch mode parameter of the ISD tool Parameters: <AttenuationBehavior> RESonant | LINear | NONLinear LINear Used for linear insertion loss of test coupon (parameter value 1) NONLinear Used for non-linear insertion loss of test coupon (parameter value 2) RESonant...
Page 980 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Load File" on page 639 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:TYPE), this command starts the measurement of the Open coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>: COUPon[:STATe]).
Page 981 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN...
Page 982 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: Section 8.2.8, "Fixture modeling", on page 1642 Usage: Event Manual operation: "Measure" on page 640 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command loads the "DUT + Test Fixture" properties from a Touchstone file.
Page 983 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:FTIMe:DUT <FltDutAndLeadIns> is set to TRUE, this command allows CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:FTIMe:OVERride to set the flight time for DUT + Lead-ins manually. This is equivalent to setting the leadin_dut_time batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to a numeric value (not auto).
Page 984 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PASSivity <Boolean> Defines whether the ISD tool shall enforce passivity and reciprocity for the test cou- pons and the test fixture. Corresponds to the passive batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 985 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ● ...:RIGHt: skip the ports on the right (according to the port order specified using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer) Equivalent to setting the ports_to_skip batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to -1, 0 or -2, respectively. to define an arbitrary set of ports to be CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PORT:SKIP skipped.
Page 986 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON) if a deembedding file shall be assinged to port <Pt>, 0 (OFF) otherwise Example: Section 8.2.8, "Fixture modeling", on page 1642 Manual operation: "Apply" on page 641 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:SCALe:ATTenuation <AttenLeadInScaling> Scales the test coupon’s attenuation (dB).
Page 987 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference For detailed information, see the ISD user guide. Parameters: <SMOOTHING> NONE | SMO1 | SMO2 | SMO3 | SMO4 "None", "Smooth," "Smoother", "Smoothest" or "Smoothest + DUT's IL and RL" Options: R&S ZNB3-K220 Manual operation: "Smoothing"...
Page 988 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:AUTO <Boolean> Enables/disables the impedance correction of the SFD tool. This is a global setting. Duplicate of CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:IMPedance, kept for backward compatibility. Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Impedance correction enabled OFF (0) Impedance correction disabled Manual operation: "Use Impedance Correction"...
Page 989 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: SFD:DUT:MEASure).
Page 990 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Manual operation: "Load File" on page 640 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT: MEASure:FILename.
Page 991 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:RUN:RUN Runs the SFD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ● The test coupon measurement (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon: MEASure) finished successfully, or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename ●...
Page 992 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel... (other) ..................992 CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory ................992 CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault ..............992 CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault:CLEar ..................992 CALCulate:FMODel:QSETup ..................993 CALCulate:FMODel:REName CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory <String> Defines the common working directory of the ISD, SFD and EZD fixture modeling tools. Parameters: <String> Directory path, either absolute or relative to the current directory (MMEMory:CDIRectory).
Page 993 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:REName <Boolean> If set to ON (1), the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Set Directory/Timestamp Filenames"...
Page 994 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference ..................1008 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................1009 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............1009 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] ..................1009 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:X:OFFSet ..................1009 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:Y:OFFSet CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Resets the circle test for the active trace of channel <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation:...
Page 995 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line, centered at the origin of the polar dia- gram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:FORMat POLar CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay ON Activate a polar diagram and show the circle limit line in the dia- gram.
Page 996 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CLEar Resets the limit check results for the limit line test. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 387 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates limit line segments.
Page 997 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Select a linear frequency sweep (default) and define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values (–40 dB). CALC:LIM:DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram.
Page 998 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference 1 – upper limit line segment 2 – lower limit line segment Range: 0, 1, 2 (see above) <StartStim>, Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the <StopStim>, limit line segment.
Page 999 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference The display circle is defined using CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> If set to ON, the line of the display circle is shown whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format.
Page 1000 ® Command reference R&S ZNB3000 SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values.

This manual is also suitable for:

Datatec znb3004 Datatec znb3020